DSLBD Office Fit Out - Broughton Construction Company
DSLBD Office Fit Out - Broughton Construction Company
DSLBD Office Fit Out - Broughton Construction Company
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
PROJECT MANUAL<br />
<strong>DSLBD</strong> <strong>Office</strong>s<br />
D G S<br />
Solicitation Number<br />
DCAM-13-CS-0155<br />
One Judiciary Square<br />
441 4th Street, NW<br />
8 th Floor<br />
Washington, DC 20001<br />
May 8, 2013<br />
OP●X<br />
a design solutions company<br />
Project Number 3191
TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
DGS<br />
<strong>DSLBD</strong><br />
One Judiciary Square - Eighth Floor<br />
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
Section 01 10 00 Summary<br />
Section 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures<br />
Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures<br />
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination<br />
Section 01 32 00 <strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation<br />
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures<br />
Section 01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures<br />
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements<br />
Section 01 42 00 References<br />
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls<br />
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements<br />
Section 01 73 00 Execution<br />
Section 01 74 19 <strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management and Disposal<br />
Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures<br />
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data<br />
DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS<br />
Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition<br />
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE<br />
Not Used<br />
DIVISION 4 MASONRY<br />
Not Used<br />
DIVISION 5 METALS<br />
Not Used<br />
DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES<br />
Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry<br />
Section 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork<br />
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION<br />
Section 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping<br />
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants<br />
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS<br />
Section 08 12 16 Aluminum Frames<br />
Section 08 14 00 Wood Doors<br />
Section 08 42 26 All-Glass Entrances<br />
Section 08 70 00 Hardware<br />
Section 08 80 00 Glazing<br />
DIVISION 9 FINISHES<br />
Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies<br />
Section 09 31 00 Tile<br />
Section 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings<br />
Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring<br />
OPX – Project No. 3191 TOC -1 of 2 05.08.13
TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
Section 09 68 13<br />
Section 09 91 00<br />
Carpet Tiling<br />
Painting<br />
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES<br />
Not Used<br />
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT<br />
Section 11 31 00 Residential Appliances<br />
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS<br />
Not Used<br />
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION<br />
Not Used<br />
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS<br />
Not Used<br />
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL<br />
Not Used – See Notes on Engineering Drawings<br />
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL<br />
Not Used – See Notes on Engineering Drawings<br />
APPENDIX A<br />
APPENDIX B<br />
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS<br />
SCHEDULE OF APPLIANCES<br />
END OF TABLE of CONTENTS<br />
DGS OJS <strong>DSLBD</strong> Page 2 of 2 05.08.13<br />
OPX – Project No. 3191
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other<br />
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.<br />
2. Type of the Contract.<br />
3. Work under other contracts.<br />
4. Products ordered in advance.<br />
5. Owner-furnished products.<br />
6. Use of premises.<br />
7. Work restrictions.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary<br />
use of Owner's facilities.<br />
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Project Identification: DGS – One Judiciary Square<br />
1. Project Location: 441 4 th Street, NW Washington, DC 20001 Eighth Floor<br />
B. Owner: DC Government<br />
1. Owner's Representative: Hares Sayed 202.442.4991 hares.sayed@dc.gov<br />
C. Architect: OPX, 21 Dupont Circle NW, Washington, DC 20036,<br />
1. Contact: Ken Terzian, Principal 202.721.1686 kterzian@opxglobal.com<br />
D. Contractor: TBD<br />
E. The Work consists of the following:<br />
1. The Work includes demolition of existing interior tenant build out 8th floor, tenant modifications to the floor<br />
layout for two suites, ceiling, finishes, including carpet and interior architectural woodwork. See mechanical<br />
and electrical specifications for the work required.<br />
1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS<br />
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without<br />
interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed<br />
under separate contracts.<br />
1.5 USE OF PREMISES<br />
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during<br />
construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other<br />
contractors on portions of Project.<br />
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period.<br />
Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.<br />
1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS<br />
A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working<br />
hours, Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated or approved by the building management.<br />
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted<br />
under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to<br />
requirements indicated:<br />
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.<br />
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.<br />
1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS<br />
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and<br />
CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.<br />
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the<br />
Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is<br />
incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the<br />
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.<br />
2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.<br />
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended<br />
meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:<br />
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated.<br />
Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as<br />
the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as<br />
singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.<br />
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements<br />
expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or<br />
subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled<br />
indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.<br />
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a<br />
colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 10 00<br />
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2
SECTION 01 20 00 - PRICE and PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included:<br />
1. Schedule of Values<br />
2. Applications for Payment<br />
3. Change Order Procedures<br />
4. Allowances<br />
5. Alternates<br />
1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES<br />
A. Procedures:<br />
1. At least 15 days prior to first Application for Payment, submit to Architect a Schedule of Values<br />
allocated to various portions of Work.<br />
2. Prepare schedule in such form, and supported by such reasonable data to substantiate it. This<br />
schedule, unless objected to by Architect or Owner, shall be used only as a basis for Applications<br />
for Payment.<br />
B. Format:<br />
1. Schedule of Values shall in general follow sequence of sections in Specifications. Identify each line<br />
item with section number and title as listed in Table of Contents of this Project Manual.<br />
2. In addition to line item costs of sections listed, list line item costs for each of following:<br />
a. Performance and Payment Bonds (when applicable)<br />
b. Contractor's fee<br />
c. Field supervision<br />
3. Prorate costs, such as costs of overhead, insurance, taxes, warranties and record drawings,<br />
through life of Contract.<br />
4. Estimated values of each principal category of Work shall, when added together, equal total<br />
Contract Sum.<br />
5. For each line item which has an installed value greater than $20,000, break down costs to list<br />
major products or operations under each item.<br />
1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT<br />
A. Draft Applications:<br />
1. Prepare a draft copy of each application for review.<br />
2. Contractor and Architect shall schedule a "walk-through" of Project and review of draft<br />
approximately 3 days prior to submission of Application for Payment.<br />
3. Modifications and revisions made during review of draft shall be incorporated into Application for<br />
Payment.<br />
B. Format:<br />
1. Form to be used shall be AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment; including continuation<br />
sheets when required.<br />
C. Preparation of Applications:<br />
1. Present required information in a typewritten form or electronic media printout.<br />
2. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.<br />
3. Stored products may be included upon prior agreement and in accordance with criteria established<br />
by Owner.<br />
PRICE and PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-1
4. Applications containing requests for materials stored on and off site, when approved by Owner,<br />
shall be accompanied by inventory lists with unit prices and supporting invoices and certificates of<br />
insurance.<br />
5. Using data from accepted Schedule of Values, provide a dollar value in each column for each line<br />
item for work performed and stored products.<br />
6. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on a continuation sheet, listing Change Order<br />
number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.<br />
D. Submittal Procedures:<br />
1. Submit Applications for Payment at intervals stipulated in Agreement.<br />
2. Submit 3 notarized original Applications for Payment, copies will not be acceptable.<br />
3. Provide partial lien waivers for that portion of Work covered by previous Applications for Payment.<br />
Provide notarized originals, copies will not be acceptable.<br />
1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES<br />
A. Submittals:<br />
1. Change Order Forms: AIA G701<br />
B. Documentation of Change in Contract Sum and Contract Time:<br />
1. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. Provide full information<br />
required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in Work.<br />
2. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of<br />
quotation. Provide data to support computations:<br />
a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment<br />
b. Taxes, insurance and bonds<br />
c. Overhead and profit<br />
d. Justification for change in Contract time<br />
e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented<br />
3. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with<br />
additional information:<br />
a. Origin and date of claim<br />
b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom<br />
c. Time records and wage rates paid<br />
d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented<br />
C. Change Procedures:<br />
1. Architect shall advise of minor changes in Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or<br />
Contract Time by issuing Architect's Supplemental Instructions.<br />
2. Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed<br />
change with supplementary or revised Drawings or Specifications. Contractor shall prepare and<br />
submit an estimate within 10 days, including a proposed change in Contract Time for executing<br />
change and period of time during which requested price will be considered valid.<br />
3. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing<br />
proposed change and full effect on Work, with a statement describing reason for change, and effect<br />
on Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation.<br />
D. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directives:<br />
1. Architect may issue a document, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change<br />
in Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.<br />
2. Document will describe changes in Work, and will designate method of determining change in<br />
Contract Sum or Contract Time.<br />
3. Promptly execute change in Work.<br />
E. Stipulated Sum Change Orders:<br />
PRICE and PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-2
1. Change shall be based on Proposal Request and Contractor's price quotation, or Contractor's<br />
request for a Change Order as accepted by Architect and Owner.<br />
F. Unit Price Change Orders:<br />
1. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price<br />
basis.<br />
2. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-determined, execute Work under a<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive.<br />
3. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be computed as specified for Time and Material<br />
Change Order.<br />
G. Time and Material Change Orders:<br />
1. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits<br />
indicated in Conditions of Contract.<br />
2. Architect shall determine change allowable in Contract Sum and Contract Time as provided in<br />
Contract Documents.<br />
3. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis.<br />
4. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for<br />
changes in Work.<br />
H. Correlation of Contractor Submittals:<br />
1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized<br />
Change Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract Sum.<br />
2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect changes in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to<br />
adjust time for other items of work affected by change, and resubmit.<br />
3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.<br />
1.05 ALLOWANCES<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Include in Contract Sum allowances stated in Project Manual.<br />
2. Designate in construction progress schedule, delivery dates for products specified under each<br />
allowance.<br />
3. Designate in Schedule of Values quantities of materials required under each unit cost allowances.<br />
B. Product Allowances:<br />
1. Each allowance shall include:<br />
a. Cost of products to Contractor, less applicable trade discounts<br />
b. Delivery to Site.<br />
c. Labor shall be required under allowances, only when labor is specified to be included in<br />
allowance.<br />
d. Applicable taxes<br />
2. In addition to amount of each allowance, include in Contract Sum, Contractor's costs for following:<br />
a. Handling at Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage.<br />
b. Protection from elements and from damage.<br />
c. Labor for installation and finishing, except where labor is specified to be a part of<br />
allowance.<br />
d. Other related expenses required to complete installation.<br />
e. Contractor's overhead and profit.<br />
3. Allowances shall be as specified in individual specification sections of Project Manual.<br />
C. Selection of Products:<br />
1. Architect's Duties:<br />
a. Consult with Contractor in consideration of products, suppliers, or installers.<br />
b. Make selection in consultation with Owner. Obtain Owner's decision designating<br />
following:<br />
PRICE and PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-3
i) Product, model and finish<br />
ii) Accessories and attachments<br />
iii) Supplier or installer as applicable<br />
iv) Cost to Contractor, delivered to Site, or installed as applicable<br />
v) Manufacturer's warranties<br />
c. Transmit Owner's decision to Contractor<br />
d. Prepare appropriate change order<br />
2. Contractor Duties:<br />
a. Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified suppliers or installers<br />
b. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect<br />
c. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of Architect<br />
d. Notify Architect promptly of:<br />
i) Reasonable objections Contractor may have against supplier, or party under<br />
consideration for installation.<br />
ii) Effect on <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule anticipated by selections under consideration.<br />
D. Purchase, Delivery, and Installation:<br />
1. Upon notification of selection, execute a purchase agreement with designated supplier. Arrange<br />
for and process submittals as required.<br />
2. Make arrangements for delivery. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects<br />
and submit claims for transportation damage.<br />
3. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of Specifications.<br />
E. Adjustment of Costs:<br />
1. Should net cost be more or less than specified amount of allowance, Contract Sum shall be<br />
adjusted accordingly by change order.<br />
a. Amount of change order shall recognize changes in handling costs at Site, labor,<br />
installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses, as applicable, caused by<br />
selection under allowance.<br />
b. For products specified under a unit cost allowance, unit cost shall apply to quantities<br />
actually used with a nominal allowance for waste, as determined by receipted invoices, or<br />
by field measurement.<br />
2. Submit documentation for actual additional costs at Site, or other expenses caused by selection<br />
under allowance within 30 days after execution of Work.<br />
3. Failure to submit such claims within designated time shall constitute a waiver of claims for<br />
additional costs.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 20 00<br />
PRICE and PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-4
SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other<br />
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract<br />
modifications.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for<br />
substitutions made after Contract award.<br />
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK<br />
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the<br />
ontract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."<br />
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS<br />
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that<br />
may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include<br />
supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.<br />
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to<br />
stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.<br />
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating<br />
cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.<br />
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of<br />
purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.<br />
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.<br />
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.<br />
d. Include an updated Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule that indicates the effect of the change,<br />
including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity<br />
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.<br />
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor<br />
may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.<br />
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a<br />
complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract<br />
Sum and the Contract Time.<br />
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases<br />
and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.<br />
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.<br />
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.<br />
5. Include an updated Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but<br />
not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total<br />
float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.<br />
6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires<br />
substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.<br />
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.<br />
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES<br />
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Contractor will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and<br />
Contractor on AIA Document G701.<br />
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE<br />
A. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive: Architect may issue a <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive on AIA Document G714.<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in<br />
a Change Order.<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates<br />
method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.<br />
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the <strong>Construction</strong> Change<br />
Directive.<br />
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost<br />
and time adjustments to the Contract.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 26 00<br />
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other<br />
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
1. Administrative and supervisory personnel.<br />
2. Project meetings.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 1 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and fieldengineering<br />
services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.<br />
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.<br />
1.3 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure<br />
efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different<br />
Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.<br />
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one<br />
part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.<br />
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for<br />
required maintenance, service, and repair.<br />
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.<br />
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum<br />
performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including<br />
mechanical and electrical.<br />
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination.<br />
Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.<br />
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.<br />
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other<br />
construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work.<br />
Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Preparation of Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.<br />
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.<br />
5. Progress meetings.<br />
6. Preinstallation conferences.<br />
7. Project closeout activities.<br />
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.<br />
9. Project closeout activities.<br />
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to<br />
conservation of energy, water, and materials.<br />
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work.<br />
Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.<br />
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL<br />
A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required<br />
for proper performance of the Work.<br />
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS<br />
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and<br />
time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.<br />
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.<br />
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to<br />
everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.<br />
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time<br />
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference<br />
at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel<br />
assignments.<br />
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its<br />
superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference.<br />
All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to<br />
the Work.<br />
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:<br />
a. Tentative construction schedule.<br />
b. Phasing.<br />
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.<br />
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.<br />
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.<br />
f. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs).<br />
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.<br />
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.<br />
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.<br />
j. Submittal procedures.<br />
k. Use of the premises and existing building.<br />
l. Work restrictions.<br />
m. Owner's occupancy requirements.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2
n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.<br />
o. <strong>Construction</strong> waste management and recycling.<br />
p. Parking availability.<br />
q. First aid.<br />
r. Security.<br />
s. Progress cleaning.<br />
t. Working hours.<br />
3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.<br />
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation<br />
of payment requests.<br />
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier,<br />
and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of<br />
future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar<br />
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.<br />
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of<br />
significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.<br />
a. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether<br />
each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure<br />
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to<br />
ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.<br />
1) Review schedule for next period.<br />
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:<br />
1) Interface requirements.<br />
2) Sequence of operations.<br />
3) Status of submittals.<br />
4) Off-site fabrication.<br />
5) Access.<br />
6) Temporary facilities and controls.<br />
7) Work hours.<br />
8) Status of correction of deficient items.<br />
9) Field observations.<br />
10) Requests for interpretations (RFIs).<br />
11) Status of proposal requests.<br />
12) Pending changes.<br />
13) Status of Change Orders.<br />
14) Pending claims and disputes.<br />
15) Documentation of information for payment requests.<br />
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.<br />
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been<br />
present.<br />
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule after each progress meeting where<br />
revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with<br />
the report of each meeting.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 31 00<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4
SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction<br />
during performance of the Work, including the following:<br />
1. Preliminary <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
3. Submittals Schedule.<br />
4. Daily construction reports.<br />
5. Field condition reports.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the<br />
construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.<br />
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and<br />
finish times.<br />
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.<br />
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.<br />
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of<br />
costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.<br />
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are<br />
arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the<br />
critical path of Project.<br />
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that<br />
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.<br />
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.<br />
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.<br />
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring<br />
Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion<br />
date.<br />
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the<br />
successor activity.<br />
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the<br />
planned Project completion date.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1
G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.<br />
H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.<br />
I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.<br />
J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.<br />
K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as<br />
scheduled.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:<br />
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.<br />
2. Specification Section number and title.<br />
3. Submittal category (action or informational).<br />
4. Name of subcontractor.<br />
5. Description of the Work covered.<br />
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.<br />
B. Preliminary <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Submit two opaque copies.<br />
1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values<br />
for cost-loaded activities.<br />
C. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire<br />
schedule for entire construction period.<br />
1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with<br />
requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label.<br />
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer-generated<br />
reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource<br />
loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and<br />
total float in calendar days.<br />
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if<br />
known.<br />
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by<br />
activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.<br />
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.<br />
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work until most<br />
recent Application for Payment.<br />
E. Daily <strong>Construction</strong> Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.<br />
F. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with<br />
scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.<br />
B. Coordinate Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals<br />
Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.<br />
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.<br />
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper<br />
sequence.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE<br />
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction<br />
schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when<br />
establishing dates.<br />
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary construction schedule. Include submittals required<br />
during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and<br />
those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.<br />
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL<br />
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "<strong>Construction</strong> Planning & Scheduling."<br />
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion.<br />
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion<br />
date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.<br />
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work.<br />
Comply with the following:<br />
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by<br />
Architect.<br />
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major<br />
items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle<br />
activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.<br />
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal<br />
Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule with<br />
Submittals Schedule.<br />
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include proposed number of days for startup and testing for Owner’s and<br />
Architect’s review.<br />
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and<br />
allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in<br />
schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.<br />
1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.<br />
2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.<br />
3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated<br />
in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.<br />
4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in<br />
Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.<br />
5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:<br />
a. Coordination with existing construction.<br />
b. Uninterruptible services.<br />
c. Use of premises restrictions.<br />
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the<br />
Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.<br />
F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On<br />
the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests.<br />
1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.<br />
2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to<br />
submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication<br />
and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning<br />
activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and<br />
demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.<br />
3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect.<br />
4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.<br />
G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a timeimpact<br />
analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.<br />
2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date<br />
established for commencement of the Work.<br />
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a<br />
continuous vertical line. <strong>Out</strong>line significant construction activities for first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton<br />
diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.<br />
2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)<br />
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.<br />
B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM network<br />
analysis diagram for the Work.<br />
1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later<br />
than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor<br />
from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the<br />
schedule.<br />
2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors'<br />
personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.<br />
3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate<br />
procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.<br />
4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the<br />
schedule.<br />
C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary<br />
network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.<br />
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in<br />
relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:<br />
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.<br />
b. Mobilization and demobilization.<br />
c. Purchase of materials.<br />
d. Delivery.<br />
e. Fabrication.<br />
f. Utility interruptions.<br />
g. Installation.<br />
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.<br />
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates.<br />
Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.<br />
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data,<br />
reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the<br />
limitations of the Contract Time.<br />
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float<br />
near the edges.<br />
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.<br />
D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify<br />
critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:<br />
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.<br />
2. Description of activity.<br />
3. Principal events of activity.<br />
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.<br />
5. Early and late start dates.<br />
6. Early and late finish dates.<br />
7. Activity duration in workdays.<br />
8. Total float or slack time.<br />
9. Average size of workforce.<br />
10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).<br />
E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:<br />
1. Identification of activities that have changed.<br />
2. Changes in early and late start dates.<br />
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.<br />
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5
5. Changes in the critical path.<br />
6. Changes in total float or slack time.<br />
7. Changes in the Contract Time.<br />
F. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.<br />
1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.<br />
2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.<br />
3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date.<br />
4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings.<br />
a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed"<br />
with total at bottom.<br />
b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.<br />
2.5 REPORTS<br />
A. Daily <strong>Construction</strong> Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning<br />
events at Project site:<br />
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.<br />
2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.<br />
3. Equipment at Project site.<br />
4. Material deliveries.<br />
5. Accidents.<br />
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.<br />
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.<br />
8. Emergency procedures.<br />
9. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
10. Change Orders received and implemented.<br />
11. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directives received and implemented.<br />
12. Services connected and disconnected.<br />
13. Equipment or system tests and startups.<br />
14. Partial Completions and occupancies.<br />
15. Substantial Completions authorized.<br />
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract<br />
Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed<br />
description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule Updating: At biweekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction<br />
progress and activities. Issue schedule 3 days before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.<br />
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or<br />
made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.<br />
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in<br />
logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.<br />
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting<br />
agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.<br />
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.<br />
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations.<br />
Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no<br />
longer involved in performance of construction activities.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 32 00<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 7
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data,<br />
Samples, and other submittals.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.<br />
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be<br />
rejected for not complying with requirements.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided only as base drawings by<br />
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.<br />
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.<br />
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related<br />
activities that require sequential activity.<br />
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be<br />
delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.<br />
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other<br />
submittals until related submittals are received.<br />
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation" for list<br />
of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.<br />
D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review<br />
shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of<br />
failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.<br />
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with<br />
subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must<br />
be delayed for coordination.<br />
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.<br />
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.<br />
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties<br />
is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1
E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.<br />
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.<br />
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record<br />
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.<br />
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:<br />
a. Project name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Name and address of Architect.<br />
d. Name and address of Contractor.<br />
e. Name and address of subcontractor.<br />
f. Name and address of supplier.<br />
g. Name of manufacturer.<br />
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.<br />
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and<br />
then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix<br />
after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).<br />
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.<br />
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on<br />
submittals.<br />
G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes<br />
noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.<br />
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.<br />
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be<br />
returned.<br />
H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each<br />
submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than<br />
Contractor.<br />
1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:.<br />
a. Date.<br />
b. Destination (To:).<br />
c. Source (From:).<br />
d. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.<br />
e. Category and type of submittal.<br />
f. Submittal purpose and description.<br />
g. Specification Section number and title.<br />
h. Remarks.<br />
i. Signature of transmitter.<br />
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests<br />
for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from<br />
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label<br />
information as related submittal.<br />
I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.<br />
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.<br />
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2
3. Resubmit submittals until they are not marked "C, Revise and Resubmit."<br />
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers,<br />
authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution<br />
on transmittal forms.<br />
K. Use for <strong>Construction</strong>: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "A, Approved" or “B, Approved As Noted”.<br />
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES<br />
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for<br />
Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:<br />
1. Upon execution of Architect’s CADD Transfer Agreement Letter.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.<br />
1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project.<br />
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or<br />
equipment.<br />
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use,<br />
submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.<br />
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.<br />
3. Include the following information, as applicable:<br />
a. Manufacturer's product specifications.<br />
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.<br />
c. Standard color charts.<br />
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.<br />
e. Compliance with specified referenced standards.<br />
f. Testing by recognized testing agency.<br />
g. Application of testing agency labels and seals.<br />
h. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.<br />
5. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return four<br />
copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on<br />
reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.<br />
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as<br />
applicable:<br />
a. Dimensions.<br />
b. Identification of products.<br />
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.<br />
e. Templates and patterns.<br />
f. Schedules.<br />
g. Design calculations.<br />
h. Compliance with specified standards.<br />
i. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.<br />
k. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.<br />
l. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.<br />
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets<br />
at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).<br />
3. Number of Copies: Submit five opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation<br />
and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance<br />
manuals. Architect will retain one copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy<br />
as a Project Record Drawing.<br />
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with<br />
other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered<br />
and installed.<br />
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal<br />
package.<br />
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:<br />
a. Generic description of Sample.<br />
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.<br />
c. Sample source.<br />
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.<br />
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons<br />
throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of<br />
construction associated with each set.<br />
a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the<br />
property of Contractor.<br />
4. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to<br />
be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or<br />
product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples<br />
include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components;<br />
small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color,<br />
texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.<br />
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder<br />
will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.<br />
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,<br />
connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.<br />
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product<br />
represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate<br />
limits of variations.<br />
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.<br />
1. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return<br />
copies.<br />
2. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality<br />
Requirements."<br />
B. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "<strong>Construction</strong><br />
Progress Documentation."<br />
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality<br />
Requirements."<br />
D. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form,<br />
indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is<br />
installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
E. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.<br />
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal.<br />
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN<br />
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are<br />
specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific<br />
performance and design criteria indicated.<br />
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for<br />
additional information to Architect.<br />
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit five<br />
copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system<br />
specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.<br />
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents.<br />
Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW<br />
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the<br />
Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to<br />
Architect.<br />
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location,<br />
submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and<br />
statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
3.2 ARCHITECT'S/ ACTION<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them<br />
without action.<br />
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required,<br />
and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate<br />
action taken, as follows:<br />
1. “A”, Approved<br />
2. “B”, Approved As Noted<br />
3. “C”, Revise and Resubmit<br />
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not<br />
comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.<br />
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.<br />
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 33 00<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6
SECTION 01 35 16 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Products and installation for patching and extending Work<br />
3. Transitions and adjustments<br />
4. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning<br />
5. Temporary partitions to allow building occupancy<br />
6. Waste management<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Procedures and administration requirements of this section apply to all sections of specifications<br />
that are involved in alterations to building.<br />
2. Assign work of moving, removal, cutting, patching, and repair to trades so as to cause least<br />
damage to each type of work encountered, and to return building as much as possible to<br />
appearance of new work.<br />
3. Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in work of finish trade involved.<br />
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Unforeseen Conditions:<br />
1. Should unforeseen conditions be encountered that affect design or function of Project, investigate<br />
fully and submit an accurate, detailed, written report to Architect.<br />
2. While awaiting Architect’s response, reschedule operations if needed to avoid delay of overall<br />
Project.<br />
1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING<br />
A. Work Sequencing:<br />
1. Access to occupied spaces shall be obtained through [Owner] [Building Manager] [Tenant] with a<br />
minimum of 72 hours notification.<br />
2. Work done in occupied spaces shall be left clean and neat, and free from dust accumulations.<br />
3. Jack-hammering, use of power actuator, hammer drilling, and other similar operations creating<br />
noises, odors, or fumes shall not be performed between hours of 8:00 AM and 6:00 PM. All<br />
operations creating conditions as indicated above shall cease sufficiently in advance of 8:00 AM to<br />
allow for clean up as necessary to allow use of spaces by Owner, public, and tenants where<br />
needed.<br />
B. Public Access:<br />
1. Public access to occupied spaces shall be maintained at all times during normal business hours.<br />
Provide protection for work in-place and safety of public during construction.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. New Materials:<br />
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 16-1
1. Materials shall be as specified in other specification sections contained in this Project Manual.<br />
2. Match existing products and work as needed for patching and extending work<br />
B. Existing Products:<br />
1. Determine type and quality by inspection and testing of existing products where necessary,<br />
referring to existing work as a standard.<br />
2. Where a product or type of construction occurs in existing building, and is not specified as part of<br />
new work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend, or match<br />
existing work.<br />
3. This specification will generally not describe existing products or standards of execution, nor<br />
enumerate products that are not a part of new construction. Existing product is its own<br />
specification.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Site Verification of Conditions:<br />
1. Survey existing conditions and correlate with Drawings and Specifications to determine extent of<br />
removal needed.<br />
2. Verify that demolition and removal is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work.<br />
3. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work.<br />
4. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation constitutes<br />
acceptance of conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protection:<br />
1. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to<br />
provide for Owner occupancy. Maintain construction areas adjacent to occupied areas under<br />
sufficient negative pressure to prevent dust and debris from spreading to occupied areas. Return<br />
occupied areas to same as found or better level of cleanliness prior to securing Work for day.<br />
2. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of<br />
temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed<br />
areas.<br />
3. Protect remaining finishes, equipment and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting, moving,<br />
removal, and patching operations. Protect surfaces that will remain a part of finished work. Repair<br />
damages caused to facilities scheduled to remain without additional cost or delay to Owner.<br />
4. Protect existing and new work from weather and cold. Provide waterproofing, weather protection,<br />
heat or other facilities and protection to prevent damage to new work and to remaining work.<br />
5. Take steps as necessary to protect and minimize false alarms to building fire alarm and security<br />
systems. Coordinate false alarm protection efforts with building manager to maintain system<br />
function.<br />
6. Provide shoring and bracing needed to keep building structurally secure and free of deflection and<br />
for installation of new structural members. Increase or add new structural supports as needed by<br />
progress of work.<br />
7. Place roof walk boards over roof areas to protect roofing membrane. Fasten or attach roof<br />
protection boards to keep them from being blown off roof; do not harm integrity of roof. Protection<br />
shall be provided in such a manner as to completely protect areas subject to damage.<br />
B. Surface Preparation:<br />
1. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation work. Replace<br />
and restore following installation of new work.<br />
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 16-2
3.03 REPAIR/RESTORATION<br />
2. Remove unsuitable materials, not indicated for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and<br />
deteriorated masonry and concrete.<br />
3. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.<br />
4. Replace, extend, or match materials as indicated for finished Work.<br />
5. Prepare surface and remove finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes.<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to<br />
accommodate Owner occupancy.<br />
2. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring<br />
products and finishes to [original] [specified] condition.<br />
3. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition<br />
for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.<br />
4. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing systems to full<br />
operational condition.<br />
5. Install products as specified in individual sections.<br />
B. Reuse of Existing Materials:<br />
1. Save sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work or patch new work<br />
as needed.<br />
2. Do not incorporate used materials in new construction, except as specifically designated or where<br />
small quantities of finish materials that are difficult to match are used for patching or extending<br />
purposes.<br />
C. Transitions:<br />
1. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched<br />
work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make patch or transition<br />
invisible to eye from a distance of 4 feet (1200 mm).<br />
2. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate<br />
existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to<br />
Architect.<br />
3. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, re-work floors, walls,<br />
and ceilings to a smooth plane, without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.<br />
4. At locations in existing areas where partitions are to be removed, patch floor, walls, and ceilings<br />
with new finish materials to match adjacent finishes.<br />
5. Where a change of plane of 1/4” or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth<br />
transition for Architect’s acceptance.<br />
6. Trim existing doors as needed to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as needed.<br />
D. Finishes:<br />
1. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections.<br />
2. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be<br />
matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.<br />
3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION<br />
A. Repair of Damaged Surfaces:<br />
1. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing<br />
other imperfections to a condition equal to its condition at time Work was started.<br />
2. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.<br />
3.05 CLEANING<br />
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 16-3
A. In addition to progress cleaning, clean Owner occupied areas of Work.<br />
B. As soon as Work in each area of alteration is complete, clean up surfaces, remove equipment, salvage and<br />
debris, and return areas to a good condition suitable for use by Owner as quickly as possible.<br />
3.06 WASTE MANAGEMENT<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Separate and recycle off-cuts and waste materials in compliance with Waste Management Plan and<br />
to maximum extent economically feasible.<br />
2. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.<br />
3. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal.<br />
4. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated waste materials. Deliver to or arrange collection<br />
by individuals or organizations for verifiable reuse or re-manufacturing.<br />
B. Items listed below have unique or regulated disposal requirements and shall be removed and disposed of in<br />
manner dictated by law or in most environmentally responsible manner. Typical concerns are listed in<br />
parentheses:<br />
1. Fluorescent light ballasts manufactured prior to 1978. (PCB)<br />
2. Fluorescent lamps (Mercury)<br />
3. Refrigeration, air-conditioning, and other equipment containing refrigerants (CFC recovery)<br />
4. Batteries (Lead, acid, mercury)<br />
5. Paints, solvents, and other hazardous fluids<br />
6. Asbestos based materials<br />
7. Materials with lead based finishes<br />
C. Maintain an inventory of removed materials, and submit tracking forms for removed materials indicating type,<br />
quantities, condition, destination, and end use.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 35 16<br />
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 16-4
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 -<br />
PART 2 - GENERAL<br />
2.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
2.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.<br />
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These<br />
services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.<br />
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the<br />
Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard<br />
products.<br />
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control<br />
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.<br />
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect,<br />
Owner,or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.<br />
2.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work<br />
to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.<br />
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work<br />
to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements.<br />
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.<br />
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made<br />
under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution,<br />
and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish<br />
the standard by which the Work will be judged.<br />
D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance<br />
characteristics.<br />
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and<br />
materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.<br />
F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to<br />
conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and<br />
compliance with industry standards.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1
G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or<br />
shop.<br />
H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for<br />
completed Work.<br />
I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the<br />
same as testing agency.<br />
J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or<br />
Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and<br />
similar operations.<br />
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by<br />
accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not<br />
imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.<br />
K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five<br />
previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and<br />
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting<br />
requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer<br />
uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.<br />
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided<br />
or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may<br />
exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are<br />
minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision<br />
before proceeding.<br />
2.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and<br />
experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a<br />
recognized authority.<br />
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:<br />
1. Specification Section number and title.<br />
2. Description of test and inspection.<br />
3. Identification of applicable standards.<br />
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.<br />
5. Number of tests and inspections required.<br />
6. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.<br />
7. Requirements for obtaining samples.<br />
C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:<br />
1. Date of issue.<br />
2. Project title and number.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.<br />
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.<br />
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.<br />
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.<br />
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.<br />
8. Complete test or inspection data.<br />
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.<br />
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.<br />
11. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.<br />
12. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.<br />
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications,<br />
inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,<br />
correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing<br />
on performance of the Work.<br />
2.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual<br />
Specification Sections specify additional requirements.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material,<br />
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of<br />
successful in-service performance.<br />
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for<br />
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to<br />
produce required units.<br />
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with<br />
a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.<br />
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where<br />
Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering<br />
services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those<br />
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.<br />
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by<br />
entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated<br />
and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.<br />
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.<br />
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability<br />
to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional<br />
qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable<br />
to authorities.<br />
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.<br />
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation<br />
Program.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is<br />
trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material,<br />
design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.<br />
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with<br />
specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:<br />
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:<br />
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.<br />
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent<br />
delaying the Work.<br />
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar qualityassurance<br />
service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each<br />
report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.<br />
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and<br />
finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:<br />
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.<br />
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.<br />
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.<br />
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.<br />
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.<br />
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed<br />
Work.<br />
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2.7 QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a<br />
qualified testing agency to perform these services.<br />
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged<br />
and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.<br />
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to<br />
comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by<br />
Change Order.<br />
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated,<br />
provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform qualitycontrol<br />
services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.<br />
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform<br />
these quality-control services.<br />
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.<br />
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will<br />
be performed.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in<br />
duplicate, of each quality-control service.<br />
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are<br />
Contractor's responsibility.<br />
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.<br />
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled<br />
components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as<br />
specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."<br />
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide<br />
quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply<br />
with the Contract Documents.<br />
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architectand Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified<br />
personnel to perform required tests and inspections.<br />
1. Notify Architectand Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during<br />
performance of its services.<br />
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.<br />
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work<br />
complies with or deviates from requirements.<br />
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service<br />
through Contractor.<br />
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any<br />
portion of the Work.<br />
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.<br />
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control<br />
services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations<br />
to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:<br />
1. Access to the Work.<br />
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.<br />
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist<br />
agency in obtaining samples.<br />
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.<br />
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.<br />
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.<br />
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.<br />
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services<br />
with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and<br />
inspecting.<br />
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.<br />
H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services<br />
required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.<br />
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect,testing agencies, and each party involved in<br />
performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.<br />
2.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:<br />
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the<br />
completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.<br />
2. Notifying Architectand Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during<br />
performance of its services.<br />
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to<br />
Architectwith copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of<br />
unresolved deficiencies.<br />
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with<br />
or deviates from the Contract Documents.<br />
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.<br />
PART 3 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 4 - EXECUTION<br />
4.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG<br />
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:<br />
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.<br />
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.<br />
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.<br />
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.<br />
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection<br />
log for Architect'sreference during normal working hours.<br />
4.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION<br />
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and<br />
restore substrates and finishes.<br />
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections.<br />
Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible<br />
as possible.<br />
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."<br />
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.<br />
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control<br />
services.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 40 00<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6
SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other<br />
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.<br />
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests,<br />
"approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.<br />
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected,"<br />
"approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."<br />
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications,<br />
and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the<br />
same meaning as "indicated."<br />
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules,<br />
conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.<br />
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar<br />
operations.<br />
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting,<br />
placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.<br />
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.<br />
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on<br />
Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.<br />
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS<br />
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable<br />
construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract<br />
Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.<br />
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards<br />
applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.<br />
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in<br />
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1
in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to<br />
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.<br />
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253<br />
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080<br />
Available from Access Board<br />
www.access-board.gov<br />
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498<br />
Available from Government Printing <strong>Office</strong> (202) 512-1530<br />
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr<br />
CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634-2355<br />
Available from Army Corps of Engineers<br />
Waterways Experiment Station<br />
www.wes.army.mil<br />
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-6257<br />
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point<br />
www.dodssp.daps.mil<br />
DSCC<br />
FED-STD<br />
Defense Supply Center Columbus<br />
(See FS)<br />
Federal Standard<br />
(See FS)<br />
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257<br />
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point<br />
www.dodssp.daps.mil<br />
Available from General Services Administration (202) 501-1021<br />
www.fss.gsa.gov<br />
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800<br />
www.nibs.org<br />
FTMS<br />
MIL<br />
MS MIL<br />
Federal Test Method Standard<br />
(See FS)<br />
See MILSPEC<br />
See MILSPEC<br />
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257<br />
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point<br />
www.dodssp.daps.mil<br />
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253<br />
Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080<br />
www.access-board.gov<br />
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS<br />
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,<br />
they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2
addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100<br />
www.aluminum.org<br />
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333<br />
www.aaadm.com<br />
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202<br />
www.aabchq.com<br />
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664<br />
www.aamanet.org<br />
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800<br />
Transportation Officials<br />
www.transportation.org<br />
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141<br />
www.aatcc.org<br />
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155<br />
www.abma-dc.org<br />
ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700<br />
(American Concrete Institute)<br />
www.aci-int.org<br />
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216<br />
www.concrete-pipe.org<br />
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530<br />
www.aeic.org<br />
AFPA<br />
American Forest & Paper Association<br />
(See AF&PA)<br />
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878<br />
www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700<br />
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000<br />
www.aga.org<br />
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118<br />
www.agc.org<br />
AHA<br />
American Hardboard Association<br />
(Now part of CPA)<br />
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955<br />
www.aham.org<br />
AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960<br />
www.asphaltinstitute.org<br />
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3
www.aia.org (202) 626-7300<br />
AISC American Institute of Steel <strong>Construction</strong> (800) 644-2400<br />
www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400<br />
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100<br />
www.steel.org<br />
AITC American Institute of Timber <strong>Construction</strong> (303) 792-9559<br />
www.aitc-glulam.org<br />
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522<br />
www.alca.org (703) 736-9666<br />
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700<br />
www.alsc.org<br />
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150<br />
www.amca.org<br />
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020<br />
www.ansi.org<br />
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522-1437<br />
www.aosaseed.com<br />
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600<br />
www.apawood.org<br />
APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989<br />
www.archprecast.org<br />
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000<br />
www.api.org<br />
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800<br />
www.ari.org<br />
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917<br />
www.asphaltroofing.org<br />
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723<br />
www.asce.org (703) 295-6300<br />
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723<br />
Air-Conditioning Engineers<br />
www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400<br />
ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763<br />
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722<br />
www.asme.org<br />
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040<br />
www.asse-plumbing.org<br />
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)<br />
www.astm.org<br />
AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300<br />
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)<br />
www.awci.org<br />
AWCMA<br />
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association<br />
(See WCSC)<br />
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811<br />
www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600<br />
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800<br />
www.awpa.com<br />
AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353<br />
www.aws.org (305) 443-9353<br />
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337<br />
www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711<br />
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122<br />
www.buildershardware.com<br />
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010<br />
www.bia.org<br />
BICSI BICSI (813) 979-1991<br />
www.bicsi.org<br />
BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963<br />
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's<br />
Association International)<br />
www.bifma.com<br />
CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312<br />
www.carpetcushion.org<br />
CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471<br />
www.umr.edu/~ccfss<br />
CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282<br />
www.copper.org (212) 251-7200<br />
CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263<br />
www.canelect.ca<br />
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333<br />
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com<br />
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700<br />
www.cganet.com<br />
CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (800) 665-2472<br />
www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (819) 956-0425<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 5
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462<br />
www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462<br />
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems <strong>Construction</strong> Association (630) 584-1919<br />
www.cisca.org<br />
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137<br />
www.cispi.org<br />
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583<br />
www.chainlinkinfo.org<br />
CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604<br />
www.pbmdf.com<br />
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772<br />
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607<br />
CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846<br />
www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176<br />
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200<br />
www.crsi.org<br />
CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727<br />
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000<br />
www.csa-international.org<br />
CSI <strong>Construction</strong> Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900<br />
www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300<br />
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700<br />
www.cedarbureau.org<br />
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087<br />
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)<br />
www.cti.org<br />
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010<br />
www.dhi.org<br />
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500<br />
www.eia.org<br />
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462<br />
www.eima.com (770) 968-7945<br />
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723<br />
www.asce.org (703) 295-6300<br />
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040<br />
www.ejma.org<br />
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 6
FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333<br />
www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org<br />
FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00<br />
(The International Basketball Federation)<br />
www.fiba.com<br />
FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35<br />
(The International Volleyball Federation)<br />
www.fivb.ch<br />
FM<br />
Factory Mutual System<br />
(See FMG)<br />
FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000<br />
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)<br />
www.fmglobal.com<br />
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772<br />
www.floridaroof.com<br />
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850<br />
www.fluidsealing.com<br />
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905<br />
www.fscoax.org<br />
GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440<br />
www.gypsum.org<br />
GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208<br />
www.glasswebsite.com<br />
GRI<br />
Geosynthetic Research Institute<br />
(See GSI)<br />
GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400<br />
www.greenseal.org<br />
GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440<br />
www.geosynthetic-institute.org<br />
HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744<br />
www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700<br />
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200<br />
www.gamanet.org<br />
HMMA<br />
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association<br />
(See NAAMM)<br />
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900<br />
www.hpva.org<br />
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550<br />
www.hpwhite.com<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 7
IAS<br />
International Approval Services<br />
(See CSA)<br />
IBF International Badminton Federation (441-24) 223-4904<br />
www.intbadfed.org<br />
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369<br />
www.icea.net<br />
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830<br />
www.icri.org<br />
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11<br />
www.iec.ch<br />
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900<br />
www.ieee.org<br />
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000<br />
www.iesna.org<br />
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234<br />
www.igcc.org<br />
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233-1510<br />
www.igmaonline.org<br />
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426<br />
www.iliai.com<br />
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11<br />
www.iso.ch<br />
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150<br />
www.issfa.net<br />
ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851<br />
www.intertek.com (607) 753-6711<br />
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11<br />
www.itu.int/home<br />
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690<br />
www.kcma.org<br />
LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700<br />
www.lma.org<br />
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864<br />
www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200<br />
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333<br />
www.mbma.com<br />
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 8
www.maplefloor.org<br />
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610<br />
www.metalframingmfg.org<br />
MH<br />
Material Handling Industry of America<br />
(See MHIA)<br />
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815<br />
www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190<br />
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222<br />
www.marble-institute.com<br />
MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937<br />
www.paintinfo.com<br />
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613<br />
<strong>Fit</strong>tings Industry Inc.<br />
www.mss-hq.com<br />
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405<br />
www.naamm.org<br />
NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200<br />
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)<br />
www.nace.org<br />
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926<br />
www.nadca.com<br />
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, ext.<br />
453<br />
www.aahperd.org/nagws/<br />
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084<br />
www.naima.org<br />
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848<br />
www.nbgqa.com<br />
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222<br />
www.ncaa.org<br />
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900<br />
www.ncma.org<br />
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094<br />
www.ncpi.org<br />
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550<br />
www.ncta.com<br />
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698<br />
www.nebb.org<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 9
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110<br />
www.necanet.org<br />
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901<br />
www.nelma.org<br />
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200<br />
www.nema.org<br />
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441<br />
www.netaworld.org<br />
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900<br />
www.nfhs.org<br />
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555<br />
www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000<br />
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776<br />
www.nfrc.org<br />
NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890<br />
www.glass.org<br />
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318<br />
www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818<br />
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393<br />
www.nlga.org<br />
NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016<br />
www.nofma.org<br />
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545<br />
www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070<br />
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622<br />
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400<br />
NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275<br />
(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010<br />
www.nsf.org<br />
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415<br />
www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788<br />
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736<br />
www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930<br />
NTRMA<br />
NWWDA<br />
National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association<br />
(See RTI)<br />
National Wood Window and Door Association<br />
(See WDMA)<br />
OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 10
www.opl.com (210) 635-8100<br />
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300<br />
www.pci.org<br />
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322<br />
www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322<br />
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956<br />
www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720<br />
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929<br />
www.pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu<br />
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540<br />
www.post-tensioning.org<br />
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400<br />
www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400<br />
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580<br />
www.rfci.com<br />
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339<br />
www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662<br />
RTI Roof Tile Institute (312) 670-4177<br />
(Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association)<br />
www.ntrma.org<br />
SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841<br />
www.sae.org<br />
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930<br />
www.sdi.org<br />
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010<br />
www.steeldoor.org<br />
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424<br />
www.sefalabs.com<br />
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234<br />
www.sgcc.org<br />
SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075<br />
www.siaonline.org<br />
SIGMA<br />
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association<br />
(See IGMA)<br />
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995<br />
www.steeljoist.org<br />
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991<br />
www.smacentral.org<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 11
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980<br />
National Association<br />
www.smacna.org<br />
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100<br />
www.smpte.org<br />
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154<br />
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics<br />
Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)<br />
www.sprayfoam.org<br />
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611<br />
www.spib.org<br />
SPI/SPFD<br />
Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The)<br />
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division<br />
(See SPFA)<br />
SPRI SPRI (781) 647-7026<br />
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)<br />
www.spri.org<br />
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355<br />
www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630<br />
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772<br />
www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331<br />
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265<br />
www.steeltank.com<br />
SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333<br />
www.steelwindows.com<br />
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974<br />
www.swrionline.org<br />
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453<br />
www.tileusa.com<br />
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700<br />
Industries Alliance<br />
www.tiaonline.org<br />
TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700<br />
www.masonrysociety.org<br />
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (608) 833-5900<br />
www.tpinst.org<br />
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873<br />
www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898<br />
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 12
www.ul.com (847) 272-8800<br />
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902<br />
www.uni-bell.org<br />
USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539<br />
www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800<br />
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422<br />
www.usgbc.org<br />
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488<br />
www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463<br />
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869<br />
www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700<br />
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486<br />
www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651<br />
WCMA<br />
Window Covering Manufacturers Association<br />
(See WCSC)<br />
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636<br />
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 661-4261<br />
Association)<br />
www.windowcoverings.org<br />
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301<br />
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200<br />
Door Association)<br />
www.wdma.com<br />
WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943<br />
www.wicnet.org<br />
WIC<br />
Woodwork Institute of California<br />
(See WI)<br />
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889<br />
www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591<br />
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333<br />
www.wsrca.com (650) 548-0112<br />
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930<br />
www.wwpa.org<br />
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they<br />
shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site<br />
addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
BOCA BOCA International, Inc.<br />
(See ICC)<br />
CABO<br />
Council of American Building Officials<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 13
(See ICC)<br />
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100<br />
www.iapmo.org<br />
ICBO<br />
ICBO ES<br />
International Conference of Building Officials<br />
(See ICC)<br />
ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.<br />
(See ICC-ES)<br />
ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533<br />
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)<br />
www.iccsafe.org<br />
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587<br />
www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543<br />
SBCCI<br />
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.<br />
(See ICC)<br />
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract<br />
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers,<br />
and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the<br />
Contract Documents.<br />
CE Army Corps of Engineers<br />
www.usace.army.mil<br />
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772<br />
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-6816<br />
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000<br />
www.commerce.gov<br />
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220<br />
www.eren.doe.gov<br />
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167<br />
www.epa.gov<br />
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000<br />
www.faa.gov<br />
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332<br />
www.fda.gov<br />
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111<br />
www.gsa.gov (202) 501-1888<br />
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112<br />
www.hud.gov<br />
LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (510) 486-4000<br />
www.lbl.gov<br />
NCHRP<br />
National Cooperative Highway Research Program<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 14
(See TRB)<br />
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478<br />
www.nist.gov<br />
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742<br />
www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999<br />
PBS<br />
Public Building Service<br />
(See GSA)<br />
PHS <strong>Office</strong> of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694<br />
//phs.os.dhhs.gov<br />
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540<br />
(See USDA)<br />
SD State Department (202) 647-4000<br />
www.state.gov<br />
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934<br />
www.nas.edu/trb<br />
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791<br />
www.usda.gov<br />
USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000<br />
www.usps.com<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 42 00<br />
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 15
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and<br />
weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction<br />
or substantial temporary closures.<br />
1.4 USE CHARGES<br />
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to<br />
use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,<br />
Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before<br />
use. Obtain required certifications and permits.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for<br />
operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before<br />
Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES<br />
A. Common-Use Field <strong>Office</strong>: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean<br />
and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:<br />
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.<br />
2. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to<br />
22 deg C) unless temporary use of the building systems is arranged with owners representative.<br />
3. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1
2.2 EQUIPMENT<br />
1. Heating Equipment: Coordinate with Owner for use of permanent heating system.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the<br />
Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.<br />
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed<br />
or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.<br />
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.<br />
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if<br />
necessary, to make connections for temporary services.<br />
B. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and<br />
maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition<br />
existing before initial use.<br />
1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable<br />
size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.<br />
C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying<br />
of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high<br />
humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.<br />
D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying<br />
of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select<br />
equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate<br />
ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.<br />
E. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is<br />
maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.<br />
F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction<br />
operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.<br />
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating<br />
entire system.<br />
G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction<br />
personnel. Install minimum of one telephone line(s) for each field office.<br />
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:<br />
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.<br />
a. Police and fire departments.<br />
b. Ambulance service.<br />
c. Contractor's home office.<br />
d. Architect's office.<br />
e. Owner's office.<br />
f. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.<br />
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.<br />
3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION<br />
A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of<br />
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of<br />
security.<br />
B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting<br />
structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.<br />
C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed,<br />
from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight<br />
enclosure for building exterior.<br />
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary<br />
enclosures.<br />
D. Dustproof Temporary Partitions as applicable: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt<br />
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and/or tenants from fumes and noise.<br />
1. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor<br />
with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls.<br />
Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood.<br />
a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48<br />
inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.<br />
2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.<br />
3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.<br />
4. Protect air-handling equipment.<br />
5. Weather strip openings.<br />
6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.<br />
3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL<br />
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of<br />
temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.<br />
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.<br />
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar<br />
facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to<br />
permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been<br />
replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if<br />
necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary<br />
facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily<br />
repaired.<br />
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to<br />
take possession of Project identification signs.<br />
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply<br />
with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."<br />
END OF SECTION 01 50 00<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product<br />
delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product<br />
substitutions; and comparable products.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously<br />
purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar<br />
intent.<br />
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or<br />
other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of<br />
the Contract Documents.<br />
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that<br />
products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products<br />
salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.<br />
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the<br />
Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required.<br />
Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.<br />
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.<br />
2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:<br />
a. Specification Section number and title.<br />
b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.<br />
c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.<br />
d. Manufacturer's name and address.<br />
e. Supplier's name and address.<br />
f. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date.<br />
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 5 copies of initial product<br />
list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.<br />
a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that<br />
must be established early in Contract period.<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1
4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 5 copies of completed<br />
product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract<br />
requirements.<br />
5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed<br />
product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation<br />
of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of<br />
requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.<br />
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or<br />
installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.<br />
1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:<br />
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.<br />
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the<br />
Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to<br />
accommodate proposed substitution.<br />
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified.<br />
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,<br />
and specific features and requirements indicated.<br />
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation<br />
procedures.<br />
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.<br />
f. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for<br />
compliance with requirements indicated.<br />
g. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a<br />
model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
h. Detailed comparison of Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule using proposed substitution with<br />
products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or<br />
method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from<br />
manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.<br />
i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.<br />
j. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract<br />
Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.<br />
k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary<br />
because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.<br />
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation<br />
within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection<br />
of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or<br />
documentation, whichever is later.<br />
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.<br />
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within<br />
time allocated.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project,<br />
product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were<br />
also options.<br />
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss,<br />
including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Delivery and Handling:<br />
1. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable,<br />
hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.<br />
2. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or<br />
other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting,<br />
and installing.<br />
3. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products<br />
are undamaged and properly protected.<br />
C. Storage:<br />
1. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.<br />
2. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.<br />
3. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weatherprotection<br />
requirements for storage.<br />
4. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.<br />
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES<br />
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by<br />
the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor<br />
of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular<br />
product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.<br />
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to<br />
extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.<br />
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for<br />
execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.<br />
2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for<br />
submitting special warranties.<br />
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."<br />
1.8 LABELS:<br />
A. Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface. Where needed for observation after installation,<br />
locate on an accessible surface that, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.<br />
B. Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating data, do not permanently attach or imprint<br />
manufacturer’s or producer’s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to<br />
view either in occupied spaces or on exterior of Work.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 3
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged<br />
and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.<br />
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete<br />
installation and indicated use and effect.<br />
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide<br />
standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other<br />
projects.<br />
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the<br />
Contract Documents.<br />
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.<br />
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.<br />
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient<br />
characteristics" of products.<br />
7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved<br />
equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for<br />
use of an unnamed product.<br />
B. Product Selection Procedures:<br />
1. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of<br />
the products listed that complies with requirements.<br />
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS<br />
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed.<br />
Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.<br />
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If<br />
the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record<br />
noncompliance with these requirements:<br />
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other<br />
considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional<br />
responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost<br />
of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.<br />
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.<br />
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.<br />
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.<br />
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.<br />
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.<br />
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 60 00<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 4
SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
1. Field engineering and surveying.<br />
2. General installation of products.<br />
3. Coordination of Owner-installed products.<br />
4. Progress cleaning.<br />
5. Starting and adjusting.<br />
6. Protection of installed construction.<br />
7. Correction of the Work.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as<br />
existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical<br />
and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.<br />
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.<br />
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing<br />
are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities<br />
and other construction affecting the Work.<br />
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm<br />
sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.<br />
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.<br />
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where<br />
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.<br />
Record observations.<br />
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required<br />
by other Sections, include the following:<br />
a. Description of the Work.<br />
b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.<br />
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1
c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.<br />
d. Recommended corrections.<br />
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.<br />
3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before<br />
equipment and fixture installation.<br />
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.<br />
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work<br />
indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility<br />
structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction.<br />
Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before<br />
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of<br />
other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction<br />
progress to avoid delaying the Work.<br />
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.<br />
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the<br />
Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem<br />
encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.<br />
3.3 FIELD ENGINEERING<br />
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before<br />
beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.<br />
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect.<br />
Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate<br />
permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.<br />
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the<br />
original survey control points.<br />
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data<br />
established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.<br />
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.<br />
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points<br />
sufficient to locate the Work.<br />
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original<br />
condition.<br />
3.4 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.<br />
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.<br />
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of<br />
removal for replacement.<br />
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling, unless noted<br />
otherwise.<br />
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications<br />
indicated.<br />
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions<br />
required for product performance until Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of<br />
that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.<br />
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.<br />
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field<br />
installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and<br />
installing products to comply with indicated requirements.<br />
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place,<br />
accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.<br />
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by<br />
Architect.<br />
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.<br />
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing<br />
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be<br />
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.<br />
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the<br />
best visual effect. <strong>Fit</strong> exposed connections together to form hairline joints.<br />
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.<br />
3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS<br />
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.<br />
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction<br />
forces.<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of<br />
the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes<br />
to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.<br />
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering<br />
portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by<br />
Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.<br />
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING<br />
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for jointuse<br />
areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.<br />
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.<br />
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to<br />
rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).<br />
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers<br />
appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.<br />
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.<br />
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the<br />
Work.<br />
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.<br />
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as<br />
appropriate.<br />
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer<br />
or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning<br />
materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not<br />
damage exposed surfaces.<br />
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.<br />
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from<br />
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down<br />
sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.<br />
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place.<br />
Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the<br />
construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.<br />
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in<br />
progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction<br />
period.<br />
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING<br />
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with<br />
new units, and retest.<br />
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.<br />
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged<br />
and malfunctioning controls and equipment.<br />
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled<br />
components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality<br />
Requirements."<br />
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION<br />
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time<br />
of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.<br />
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK<br />
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with<br />
requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."<br />
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching<br />
materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.<br />
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.<br />
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible<br />
evidence of repair.<br />
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be<br />
repaired.<br />
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 73 00<br />
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5
SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:<br />
1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.<br />
2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.<br />
3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. <strong>Construction</strong> Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction,<br />
remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. <strong>Construction</strong> waste includes packaging.<br />
B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in<br />
landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.<br />
D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.<br />
E. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Salvage/Recycle Requirements: Project goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous construction waste<br />
as possible including the following materials:<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> Waste:<br />
a. Metals.<br />
b. Insulation.<br />
c. Carpet and pad.<br />
d. Gypsum board.<br />
e. Piping.<br />
f. Electrical conduit.<br />
g. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of<br />
the following uncontaminated packaging materials:<br />
1) Paper.<br />
2) Cardboard.<br />
3) Boxes.<br />
4) Plastic sheet and film.<br />
5) Polystyrene packaging.<br />
6) Wood crates.<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 1
7) Plastic pails.<br />
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN<br />
A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis.<br />
Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.<br />
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by<br />
the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.<br />
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in<br />
landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each<br />
means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.<br />
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe<br />
methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.<br />
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of<br />
their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.<br />
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include<br />
list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.<br />
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will<br />
accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.<br />
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and<br />
telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.<br />
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste<br />
including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials<br />
separation will be located.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION<br />
A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Owner or Architect. Provide handling, containers,<br />
storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire<br />
duration of the Contract.<br />
1. Comply with Section 01500 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and<br />
removal requirements.<br />
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing,<br />
monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.<br />
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for<br />
the Work occurring at Project site.<br />
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.<br />
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures<br />
and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 2
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with<br />
roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.<br />
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged,<br />
recycled, reused, donated, and sold.<br />
2. Comply with Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental<br />
protection, and noise control.<br />
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.<br />
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste<br />
materials shall be solely to Contractor.<br />
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by<br />
type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.<br />
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from<br />
Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.<br />
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.<br />
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape<br />
stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.<br />
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.<br />
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.<br />
5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.<br />
3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE<br />
A. Packaging:<br />
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.<br />
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.<br />
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets<br />
that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for<br />
recycling wood.<br />
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.<br />
B. Wood Materials:<br />
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.<br />
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.<br />
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.<br />
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill.<br />
Screen out paper after grinding.<br />
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 3
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from<br />
Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.<br />
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.<br />
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.<br />
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 74 19<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 4
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
1. Inspection procedures.<br />
2. Warranties.<br />
3. Final cleaning.<br />
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION<br />
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the<br />
following. List items below that are incomplete in request.<br />
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons<br />
why the Work is not complete.<br />
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.<br />
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and<br />
similar documents.<br />
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and<br />
utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.<br />
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement<br />
surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.<br />
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with<br />
manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.<br />
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of<br />
changeover in security provisions.<br />
8. Complete startup testing of systems.<br />
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.<br />
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and<br />
similar elements.<br />
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.<br />
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.<br />
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.<br />
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.<br />
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will<br />
either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of<br />
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items<br />
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.<br />
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is<br />
completed or corrected.<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.<br />
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION<br />
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the<br />
following:<br />
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."<br />
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or<br />
corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each<br />
item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.<br />
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.<br />
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and<br />
systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.<br />
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either<br />
proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for<br />
Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before<br />
certificate will be issued.<br />
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is<br />
completed or corrected.<br />
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)<br />
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by<br />
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by<br />
Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.<br />
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.<br />
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,<br />
floors, equipment, and building systems.<br />
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:<br />
a. Project name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Name of Architect.<br />
d. Name of Contractor.<br />
e. Page number.<br />
1.6 WARRANTIES<br />
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where<br />
commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.<br />
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the<br />
Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with<br />
Contractor.<br />
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to<br />
accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.<br />
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the<br />
product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the<br />
product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.<br />
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and<br />
name of Contractor.<br />
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to<br />
be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage<br />
finished surfaces.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 FINAL CLEANING<br />
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and<br />
ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.<br />
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to<br />
condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial<br />
Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:<br />
a. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains,<br />
films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.<br />
Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.<br />
b. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,<br />
trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.<br />
c. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.<br />
d. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or<br />
stains remain.<br />
e. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing<br />
compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and<br />
other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.<br />
f. Remove labels that are not permanent.<br />
g. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes<br />
and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair<br />
or restoration.<br />
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.<br />
h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment.<br />
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3
i. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.<br />
j. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water<br />
exposure.<br />
k. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,<br />
registers, and grills.<br />
l. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.<br />
m. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out<br />
bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent<br />
and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.<br />
n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.<br />
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on<br />
Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste<br />
materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 77 00<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4
SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals,<br />
including the following:<br />
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.<br />
2. Emergency manuals.<br />
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.<br />
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes systems and<br />
equipment.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.<br />
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial<br />
Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and<br />
mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.<br />
B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will<br />
return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.<br />
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected<br />
manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factoryauthorized<br />
service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare<br />
manuals.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:<br />
1. List of documents.<br />
2. List of systems.<br />
3. List of equipment.<br />
4. Table of contents.<br />
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance<br />
manuals that contain information about each system.<br />
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not<br />
part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.<br />
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.<br />
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system,<br />
subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists,<br />
assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation<br />
for Building Systems."<br />
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and<br />
subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the<br />
following materials, in the order listed:<br />
1. Title page.<br />
2. Table of contents.<br />
3. Manual contents.<br />
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:<br />
1. Subject matter included in manual.<br />
2. Name and address of Project.<br />
3. Name and address of Owner.<br />
4. Date of submittal.<br />
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.<br />
6. Name and address of Architect.<br />
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.<br />
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the<br />
volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.<br />
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include<br />
comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.<br />
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem,<br />
and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a<br />
single binder.<br />
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate<br />
contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold<br />
label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder<br />
into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to<br />
provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.<br />
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE<br />
MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for<br />
multiple-volume sets. Indicate Specification Section number.<br />
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate<br />
contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each<br />
divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.<br />
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for<br />
computerized electronic equipment.<br />
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.<br />
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.<br />
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.<br />
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and<br />
bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages<br />
indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.<br />
6. Photographs: Use of Photographs to show unusual conditions is acceptable. Attach reinforced, punched<br />
binder tabs on photographs and bind with text.<br />
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS<br />
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:<br />
1. Type of emergency.<br />
2. Emergency instructions.<br />
3. Emergency procedures.<br />
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and<br />
procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:<br />
1. Fire.<br />
2. Gas leak.<br />
3. Water leak.<br />
4. Power failure.<br />
5. Water outage.<br />
6. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.<br />
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and<br />
signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and<br />
manufacturer to maintain warranties.<br />
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Instructions on stopping.<br />
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.<br />
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.<br />
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.<br />
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS<br />
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification<br />
Sections and Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.<br />
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.<br />
3. Operating standards.<br />
4. Operating procedures.<br />
5. Operating logs.<br />
6. Wiring diagrams.<br />
7. Control diagrams.<br />
8. Piped system diagrams.<br />
9. Precautions against improper use.<br />
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.<br />
B. Descriptions: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Product name and model number.<br />
2. Manufacturer's name.<br />
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.<br />
4. Equipment function.<br />
5. Operating characteristics.<br />
6. Limiting conditions.<br />
7. Performance curves.<br />
8. Engineering data and tests.<br />
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.<br />
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Startup procedures.<br />
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.<br />
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.<br />
4. Regulation and control procedures.<br />
5. Instructions on stopping.<br />
6. Normal shutdown instructions.<br />
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.<br />
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.<br />
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.<br />
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.<br />
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.<br />
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL<br />
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information,<br />
product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described<br />
below.<br />
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match<br />
manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and<br />
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Product name and model number.<br />
2. Manufacturer's name.<br />
3. Color, pattern, and texture.<br />
4. Material and chemical composition.<br />
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.<br />
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:<br />
1. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.<br />
2. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.<br />
3. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.<br />
4. Repair instructions.<br />
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.<br />
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would<br />
affect validity of warranties or bonds.<br />
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.<br />
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL<br />
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information,<br />
manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare<br />
parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described<br />
below.<br />
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product<br />
name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone<br />
number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number<br />
and title in Project Manual.<br />
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following<br />
information for each component part or piece of equipment:<br />
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.<br />
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component<br />
removal, replacement, and assembly.<br />
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.<br />
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.<br />
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:<br />
1. Test and inspection instructions.<br />
2. Troubleshooting guide.<br />
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.<br />
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.<br />
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.<br />
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 5
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for<br />
equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time<br />
allotment.<br />
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and<br />
annual frequencies.<br />
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.<br />
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and<br />
cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and<br />
related services.<br />
G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would<br />
affect validity of warranties or bonds.<br />
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized<br />
reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. This requirement may be deleted on less complex<br />
projects.<br />
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by<br />
emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.<br />
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of<br />
each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.<br />
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating<br />
operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.<br />
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system,<br />
subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.<br />
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by<br />
Owner's operating personnel.<br />
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to<br />
product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work.<br />
If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the<br />
Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.<br />
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the<br />
information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.<br />
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component<br />
parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings<br />
with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.<br />
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 6
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record<br />
Documents."<br />
G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance<br />
documentation.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 78 23<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 7
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other<br />
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.<br />
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be<br />
removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.<br />
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse.<br />
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where<br />
indicated.<br />
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to<br />
be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.<br />
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP<br />
A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents,<br />
commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be<br />
encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object<br />
in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.<br />
1. Coordinate with Owner and Architect, who will establish special procedures for removal and salvage.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. If requested by the Owner or Building Manager provide a Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the<br />
following:<br />
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.<br />
Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted.<br />
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.<br />
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.<br />
4. Use of elevator and stairs.<br />
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1
5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other<br />
tenants affected by selective demolition operations.<br />
6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial<br />
occupancy of completed Work.<br />
7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.<br />
B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and<br />
extent to that indicated for this Project.<br />
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.<br />
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective<br />
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.<br />
E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section<br />
"Project Management and Coordination."<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective<br />
demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.<br />
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.<br />
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:<br />
a. Systems Furniture<br />
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective<br />
demolition.<br />
D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.<br />
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify<br />
Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.<br />
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.<br />
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during<br />
selective demolition operations.<br />
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.<br />
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition<br />
required.<br />
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.<br />
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are<br />
encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.<br />
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction<br />
photographs, preconstruction videotapes and/or templates.<br />
1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in<br />
final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make<br />
exact reproduction.<br />
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.<br />
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during<br />
selective demolition operations.<br />
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section<br />
"Summary."<br />
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and<br />
mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.<br />
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.<br />
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective<br />
demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain<br />
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.<br />
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of<br />
pipe or conduit after bypassing.<br />
a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the<br />
wall.<br />
3.3 PREPARATION<br />
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure<br />
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.<br />
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and<br />
Controls."<br />
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and<br />
damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.<br />
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from<br />
occupied portions of building.<br />
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction<br />
on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior<br />
areas.<br />
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during<br />
selective demolition operations.<br />
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.<br />
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 1<br />
Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."<br />
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability<br />
and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or<br />
uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.<br />
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.<br />
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as<br />
indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:<br />
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition<br />
operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.<br />
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least<br />
likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools<br />
designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.<br />
Temporarily cover openings to remain.<br />
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished<br />
surfaces.<br />
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as<br />
duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting<br />
operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.<br />
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.<br />
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of<br />
off-site.<br />
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent<br />
ground impact or dust generation.<br />
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads<br />
on supporting walls, floors, or framing.<br />
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section<br />
"<strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management."<br />
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:<br />
1. Clean salvaged items.<br />
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.<br />
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.<br />
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner and/or as indicated on Drawings.<br />
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.<br />
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:<br />
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new<br />
equipment.<br />
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.<br />
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.<br />
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and<br />
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional<br />
for use indicated.<br />
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective<br />
demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during<br />
selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are<br />
complete.<br />
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS<br />
A. Adhesively Applied Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the<br />
manufacturers of the above products.<br />
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by methods recommended by<br />
manufacturers.<br />
B. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.<br />
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain<br />
Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved<br />
landfill.<br />
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.<br />
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.<br />
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to<br />
grade level in a controlled descent.<br />
4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management."<br />
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.<br />
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.<br />
3.7 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations.<br />
Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.<br />
END OF SECTION 02 41 19<br />
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included: Rough carpentry as shown on the drawings.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Grade Marks:<br />
1. Lumber grade mark stamps shall contain following:<br />
a. Symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review of American Lumber Standards<br />
Committee<br />
b. Mill number or name<br />
c. Grade of lumber<br />
d. Species or species grouping or combination designation<br />
e. Rules under which graded were applicable<br />
f. Condition of seasoning at time of manufacture<br />
i) S-GRN: Unseasoned<br />
ii) S-DRY: Maximum Moisture Content 19%<br />
iii) MC-15 or KD: Maximum Moisture Content 15%<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. Lumber: PS-20; graded in accordance with established Grading Rules.<br />
1. Maximum Moisture Content: 19%<br />
2. Lumber shall be S4S dressed, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Plywood: PS 1; bearing grade trademark of American Plywood Association.<br />
C. Treated Wood:<br />
1. Fire Retardant Treatment:<br />
a. Provide materials which comply with UL surface burning characteristics, Type A in<br />
accordance with requirements of AWPA Standards C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood<br />
and kiln dried after treatment KDAT as a minimum.<br />
b. Fire retardant chemical shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate, and<br />
formaldehyde and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by U.S.<br />
Environmental Protection Agency.<br />
c. Flame spread rating shall be not more than 25, when tested by ASTM E84 with no<br />
increase in flame spread and significant progressive combustion upon continuation of<br />
test for an additional 20 minutes.<br />
d. Fire retardant lumber and plywood shall have an Underwriter's Laboratory stamp FR-S.<br />
e. Lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment, and<br />
plywood redried to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment.<br />
f. Fire retardant treated wood shall have an equilibrium moisture content of not more than<br />
25% when tested in accordance with ASTM D3201 at 95% relative humidity.<br />
2. Preservative Treatment:<br />
a. Provide materials which comply with requirements of AWPA LP-2 as a minimum.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1
D. Fasteners:<br />
1. Fasteners shall be sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity<br />
locations, and with treated wood. Plain finish shall be provided for other interior locations.<br />
2. Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.<br />
3. Expansion shield and lag bolt type shall be used for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.<br />
4. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Provide wood blocking for anchorage of other materials. Form to shapes and sizes as indicated or<br />
as may be required to accomplish a particular installation. Form blocking of minimum 2" nominal<br />
thickness material.<br />
2. Coordinate location of blocking for all surface mounted items such as equipment (TVs), wall<br />
cabinets, shelving, door stops, handrail brackets, coat hooks, wall bumpers,etc..<br />
3. On members that are to receive an applied finish surface, align subsurface to vary not more than<br />
1/8" from plane of adjacent members.<br />
4. Fasten parts of rough carpentry work securely in their proper place. Frame openings and provide<br />
blocking for work of other trades.<br />
5. Size wood before treatment to minimize cutting after treatment.<br />
B. Treated Wood:<br />
1. Fire retardant treated wood is required where used as blocking in fire rated partitions, or when part<br />
of other fire rated assemblies.<br />
2. Provide preservative treated permanent wood grounds and temporary wood grounds for proper<br />
execution of work of all trades. Remove temporary grounds when they are no longer required.<br />
3. Wood used in following areas shall be preservative treated:<br />
a. Wood in contact with earth, concrete, plaster, masonry, or steel.<br />
b. Wood used for sills, screeds, cant strips, plates, blocking, gravel stops, nailers, and<br />
bucks.<br />
4. Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated lumber unless specifically allowed by manufacturer. Only<br />
end cuts, drilling holes and joining cuts shall be permitted.<br />
C. Fasteners:<br />
1. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as required by<br />
recognized standards. Countersink bolt heads.<br />
2. Select fasteners of a size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to<br />
view in finished Work, or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members.<br />
Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.<br />
END OF SECTION 06 10 00<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-2
SECTION 06 40 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following; all of which may not be indicated or required in the Contract Documents.<br />
1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.<br />
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.<br />
3. Solid Surfacing countertops<br />
4. Closet and utility shelving.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork<br />
items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing<br />
materials and processes. Submit literature for specialty items not manufactured by architectural woodworker<br />
including, but not limited to, stand offs, reveals, metal inserts, spacers,etc.<br />
B. Shop Drawings:<br />
1. Shop drawings of woodwork items shall include AWI quality grade construction, key plan showing location of<br />
items, dimensioned plans, elevations, vertical sections, plan sections, profiles of trim and moldings, and<br />
details.<br />
2. Show reveals, joinery, anchoring to adjacent construction, shapes, thickness, wood species, cut, veneer<br />
matching, grain direction, and other similar detailed information to fully describe fabrication, finishing, and<br />
installation.<br />
3. Shop drawings shall be of sufficient detail and scale to determine compliance with intent of quality grades<br />
specified.<br />
4. Casework shop drawings shall indicate:<br />
a. <strong>Construction</strong>, cabinet style<br />
b. Tops, edges, and splashes<br />
c. Scribing and fillers<br />
d. Finish for each area<br />
e. Decorative laminate selection<br />
f. Hardware<br />
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-1
C. Samples for Verification:<br />
1. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species and cut. Include<br />
at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.<br />
2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for<br />
panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished.<br />
3. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to<br />
core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.<br />
4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior<br />
architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.<br />
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for<br />
grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.<br />
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificates indicating that woodwork complies with requirements<br />
of grades specified.<br />
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and<br />
products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method<br />
indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify<br />
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where<br />
required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after<br />
installation.<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in<br />
installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where<br />
environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and<br />
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the<br />
remainder of the construction period.<br />
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and<br />
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17<br />
and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period.<br />
C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other<br />
construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate<br />
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.<br />
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements<br />
before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-2
1.8 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified<br />
in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.<br />
B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section “Door<br />
Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products) " to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings<br />
and fabrication with hardware requirements.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and<br />
quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: See Appendix A.<br />
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Close Grained Hardwood.<br />
D. Wood Products: Comply with the following:<br />
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.<br />
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD,<br />
3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except<br />
for density.<br />
4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.<br />
E. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamineimpregnated<br />
decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.<br />
1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semi<br />
exposed edges.<br />
F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork<br />
quality standard.<br />
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this<br />
Article, which are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified.<br />
1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or<br />
that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.<br />
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do<br />
not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.<br />
3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber<br />
Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and<br />
fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and<br />
smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.<br />
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-3
1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum<br />
properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screwholding<br />
capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively.<br />
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items<br />
specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."<br />
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening.<br />
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.<br />
D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.<br />
E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.<br />
1. Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer;<br />
full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.<br />
2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide.<br />
3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide.<br />
4. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide.<br />
F. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching<br />
plastic caps with slot for wire passage.<br />
G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA<br />
finish number indicated.<br />
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.<br />
H. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in<br />
BHMA A156.9.<br />
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent<br />
moisture content.<br />
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide<br />
nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as<br />
required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.<br />
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in<br />
relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.<br />
B. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.<br />
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:<br />
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.<br />
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-4
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before<br />
shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where<br />
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.<br />
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work,<br />
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately<br />
sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.<br />
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.<br />
2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS<br />
A. Grade: Custom.<br />
B. AWI Type of Cabinet <strong>Construction</strong>: Flush overlay.<br />
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces including edges: High-pressure decorative laminate – see Appendix A<br />
D. Materials for Semi exposed Surfaces:<br />
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels<br />
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels.<br />
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.<br />
E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate,<br />
Grade BKL.<br />
F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate<br />
surfaces complying with the following requirements:<br />
1. See Appendix A<br />
2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS / SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS<br />
A. Grade: Custom.<br />
B. See Appendix A<br />
2.8 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING<br />
A. Grade: Custom.<br />
B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel with solid-lumber edge.<br />
C. Cleats: 3/4-inch solid lumber.<br />
D. Wood Species: Match species indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in<br />
same area of building, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-5
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.<br />
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as<br />
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of<br />
woodwork involved.<br />
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to<br />
extent that it was not completed in the shop.<br />
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb<br />
(including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.<br />
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.<br />
E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical<br />
treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.<br />
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,<br />
concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing<br />
screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent<br />
finish is indicated.<br />
G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust<br />
hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of<br />
hardware and accessory items as indicated.<br />
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.<br />
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.<br />
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with<br />
No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.<br />
H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside<br />
of countertop.<br />
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.<br />
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive.<br />
3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler<br />
where exposed.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not<br />
possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.<br />
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.<br />
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-6
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or<br />
soiled areas.<br />
END OF SECTION 06 40 00<br />
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-7
SECTION 07841 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated<br />
constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings<br />
containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist<br />
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original<br />
fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.<br />
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814<br />
or UL 1479:<br />
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than<br />
that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.<br />
2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings<br />
indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with<br />
adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:<br />
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.<br />
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.<br />
3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers, provide<br />
through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft at both ambient<br />
temperatures and 400 deg F.<br />
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products<br />
that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.<br />
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant throughpenetration<br />
firestop systems.<br />
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and<br />
traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or<br />
by other means.<br />
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring<br />
removal of insulation.<br />
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed<br />
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13-1
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Submit schedule with each through-penetration firestop system,<br />
along with the following information:<br />
1. Types of penetrating items.<br />
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of<br />
construction penetrated.<br />
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by UL-classified system. Refer to alphaalpha-numeric<br />
designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.<br />
C. Qualification Data: For installer<br />
D. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.<br />
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with<br />
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop<br />
Contractors."<br />
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in Project to a single qualified<br />
installer.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction<br />
condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.<br />
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following<br />
requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:<br />
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and<br />
inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop<br />
systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1<br />
Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:<br />
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and<br />
inspecting agency.<br />
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to throughpenetration<br />
firestop system designations listed by the following:<br />
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages<br />
with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number,<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13-2
shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing<br />
time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.<br />
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to<br />
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate<br />
temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates<br />
are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.<br />
B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this<br />
is inadequate, forced-air circulation.<br />
1.8 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are<br />
installed according to specified requirements.<br />
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration<br />
firestop systems.<br />
C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other<br />
construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL<br />
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the<br />
substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under<br />
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based<br />
on testing and field experience.<br />
B. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when<br />
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D:<br />
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L<br />
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L<br />
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L<br />
C. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill<br />
materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by<br />
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for<br />
firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:<br />
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:<br />
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.<br />
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill<br />
materials in liquid state.<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13-3
c. Fire-rated form board.<br />
d. Fillers for sealants.<br />
2. Temporary forming materials.<br />
3. Substrate primers.<br />
4. Collars.<br />
5. Steel sleeves.<br />
2.2 FILL MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-<br />
Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this<br />
Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void,"<br />
or "cavity" materials.<br />
B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of<br />
an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve<br />
for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.<br />
C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.<br />
D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized<br />
to fit specific diameter of penetrant.<br />
E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to<br />
galvanized steel sheet.<br />
F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or<br />
silicone compounds.<br />
G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.<br />
H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight<br />
aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.<br />
I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of<br />
mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.<br />
J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to<br />
produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.<br />
K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:<br />
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag<br />
formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless<br />
indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.<br />
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal<br />
surfaces.<br />
3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.<br />
2.3 MIXING<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13-4
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system<br />
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing<br />
equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to<br />
produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening<br />
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply<br />
with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:<br />
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could<br />
interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.<br />
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing<br />
optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning<br />
operation.<br />
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.<br />
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer<br />
using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow<br />
spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.<br />
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining<br />
surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or<br />
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove<br />
tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.<br />
3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and<br />
with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and<br />
applications indicated.<br />
B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during<br />
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire<br />
ratings indicated.<br />
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other<br />
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.<br />
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13-5
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required<br />
to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.<br />
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.<br />
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces<br />
that are flush with adjoining finishes.<br />
3.4 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems in concealed locations with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach<br />
labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be<br />
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal<br />
labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces<br />
on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal<br />
is attempted. Include the following information on labels:<br />
1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management<br />
of Any Damage."<br />
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.<br />
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.<br />
4. Date of installation.<br />
5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.<br />
6. Installer's name.<br />
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with<br />
requirements.<br />
B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are<br />
issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.<br />
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING<br />
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that<br />
are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in<br />
which openings occur.<br />
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration<br />
firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,<br />
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems<br />
immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 84 13<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13-6
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes; all of which may not be indicated or required for the Contract Documents.<br />
1. Joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.<br />
2. Joint-sealant backing.<br />
3. Miscellaneous material.<br />
B. Definitions:<br />
1. M: Masonry<br />
2. G: Glass<br />
3. A: Aluminum<br />
4. O: Other<br />
5. T: Traffic<br />
6. NT: Nontrafffic<br />
7. M: Multicomponent<br />
8. P: Pourable<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without<br />
staining or deteriorating joint substrates.<br />
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint<br />
seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare a sealant schedule describing type, brand, color and location of each sealant to be applied.<br />
Submit 3 copies of sealant schedule prior to application.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in<br />
1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the<br />
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.<br />
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.<br />
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric<br />
sealants required for this Project.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.<br />
C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals<br />
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:<br />
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint<br />
sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:<br />
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant<br />
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).<br />
2. When joint substrates are wet.<br />
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.<br />
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint<br />
sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified<br />
warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to<br />
furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other<br />
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the<br />
following:<br />
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written<br />
specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to<br />
design or construction.<br />
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.<br />
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.<br />
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work<br />
include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and<br />
with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on<br />
testing and field experience.<br />
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system<br />
that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D:<br />
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L<br />
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L<br />
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L<br />
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically<br />
curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses<br />
related to exposure and joint substrates.<br />
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous<br />
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous<br />
joint substrates indicated for Project.<br />
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated<br />
contact with food provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.<br />
D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:<br />
1. Available Products:<br />
a. Pecora Corporation; 898.<br />
b. Tremco; Tremsil 200.<br />
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).<br />
3. Class: 25.<br />
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).<br />
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.<br />
a. Use O Joint Substrates: granite, marble, ceramic tile, solid surface materials and plastic laminate.<br />
E. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:<br />
1. Available Products:<br />
a. Tremco; Dymeric 511.<br />
b. Tremco; THC-900/901.<br />
c. Tremco; Vulkem 227.<br />
d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).<br />
3. Class: 50 or less.<br />
4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic).<br />
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.<br />
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating,<br />
granite, marble, ceramic tile and wood<br />
F. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:<br />
1. Available Products:<br />
a. Tremco; Vulkem 116.<br />
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).<br />
3. Class: 25.<br />
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).<br />
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.<br />
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating,<br />
granite, marble, ceramic tile and wood.<br />
G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:<br />
1. Available Products:<br />
a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 900.<br />
b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.<br />
c. Tremco; Vulkem 921.<br />
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).<br />
3. Class: 50.<br />
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).<br />
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.<br />
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating,<br />
granite, marble, ceramic tile and wood.<br />
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.<br />
B. Available Products:<br />
1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.<br />
2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.<br />
3. Tremco; Tremflex 834.<br />
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,<br />
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based<br />
on field experience and laboratory testing.<br />
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), B (bicellular material<br />
with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint<br />
application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum<br />
sealant performance:<br />
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing<br />
sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion<br />
would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.<br />
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint<br />
substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.<br />
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing<br />
materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent<br />
nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.<br />
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint<br />
configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant<br />
manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:<br />
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including<br />
dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and<br />
compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water,<br />
surface dirt, and frost.<br />
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a<br />
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with<br />
joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing<br />
out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:<br />
a. Concrete.<br />
b. Masonry.<br />
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic and/or quarry tile.<br />
d. Dimensional stone<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5
e. Wood<br />
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.<br />
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave<br />
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the<br />
following:<br />
a. Metal.<br />
b. Glass.<br />
c. Porcelain enamel.<br />
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.<br />
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on<br />
preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant<br />
manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration<br />
onto adjoining surfaces.<br />
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that<br />
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove<br />
sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications<br />
indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.<br />
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable<br />
to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.<br />
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce<br />
cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement<br />
capability.<br />
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.<br />
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.<br />
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with<br />
dry materials.<br />
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of<br />
joints.<br />
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:<br />
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.<br />
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.<br />
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant<br />
movement capability.<br />
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool<br />
sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to<br />
eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.<br />
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or<br />
adjacent surfaces.<br />
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, as noted.<br />
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in<br />
ASTM C 1193, as noted.<br />
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.<br />
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning<br />
materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.<br />
3.5 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage<br />
resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of<br />
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or<br />
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.<br />
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE<br />
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior ceramic and dimension stone tile expansion, control, contraction, and isolation<br />
joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.<br />
1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component nonsag urethane sealant.<br />
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.<br />
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant.<br />
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
C. Joint-Sealant Application JS: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows<br />
and elevator entrances.<br />
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.<br />
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
END OF SECTION 0 7 92 00<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7
SECTION 08 12 16 - ALUMINUM FRAMES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Interior aluminum frames for doors.<br />
2. Interior aluminum frames for sidelights and fixed glass panels.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,<br />
and finishes for each type of interior aluminum frame indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For interior aluminum frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other<br />
work.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: For interior aluminum frames to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of interior aluminum frames and are<br />
based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."<br />
B. Fire-Rated Door-Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing<br />
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.<br />
1. As scheduled on Drawings.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for interior aluminum frames is based on the following:<br />
1. Frameworks; Series 2, 1 1/2" Flush Trim in clear anodized finish.<br />
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Frameworks Manufacturing, Inc. contact: Scott Rutledge 410-263-1500<br />
2. Custom Components Inc. contact: Jim Blair 800-516-9474<br />
3. Avanti Systems USA. contact: 877.282.6843<br />
ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16-1
2.2 COMPONENTS<br />
A. Aluminum Framing, General: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit<br />
structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.<br />
B. Door Frames: Reinforced for hinges and strikes.<br />
C. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with removable snap-in casing trim without<br />
exposed fasteners.<br />
2.3 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames,<br />
stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.<br />
B. Sound Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals.<br />
C. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets.<br />
D. Hardware: Comply with requirements in Division 08 door hardware Sections.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. Machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required, and<br />
fastened within frame with concealed screws.<br />
B. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered<br />
connections.<br />
C. Fabricate frames for glazing with recess and gaskets to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame.<br />
D. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.<br />
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations<br />
for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating<br />
aluminum finishes.<br />
C. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish:<br />
etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color<br />
coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.<br />
1. Color: Clear Anodized unless otherwise specified in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16-2
A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
1. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated.<br />
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with frame manufacturer's written installation instructions.<br />
B. Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates.<br />
C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96” long must be 1 piece.<br />
1. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 24” centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners<br />
approved by frame manufacturer.<br />
2. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections.<br />
3. Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap-in or trim members.<br />
4. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.<br />
3.3 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame<br />
manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.<br />
B. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1220 mm). Remove and<br />
replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 12 16<br />
ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16-3
SECTION 08 14 00 - WOOD DOORS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Solid core wood doors<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced.<br />
B. American National Standards Institute:<br />
1. ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities<br />
2. ANSI A151 Series<br />
3. ANSI A208.1 Particleboard<br />
C. American Society for Testing and Materials:<br />
1. ASTM D523 Standard Test for Specular Gloss<br />
2. ASTM D1037 Test Methods for Evaluating the Properties of Wood Base Fiber and Particle Panel<br />
Materials<br />
3. ASTM E152 Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies<br />
D. Architectural Woodwork Institute:<br />
1. AWI Quality Standards, Guide Specifications<br />
E. Door and Hardware Institute:<br />
1. DHI Publication - WDHS-3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors<br />
F. National Fire Protection Association:<br />
1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows<br />
2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code<br />
3. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies<br />
4. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies<br />
G. Window and Door Manufacturers Association:<br />
1. WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors<br />
H. Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.:<br />
1. UL Standard 10C Fire Tests of Door Assemblies<br />
2. UL Standard 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies<br />
3. UL Building Materials Directory<br />
1.03 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Trade Terms used in this Specification:<br />
1. ADHESIVE – A substance capable of bonding materials together by surface attachment.<br />
a. TYPE I ADHESIVE – Fully waterproof; forms a bond that will retain practically all its<br />
strength when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying. Bond shall be of<br />
such quality that specimens will withstand shear and two cycle boil test.<br />
b. Type II Adhesive – Water-resistant; forms a bond that will retain practically all its strength<br />
when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying. Bond shall be of such<br />
quality that specimens will withstand three cycle cold soak test.<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-1
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
2. BLENDING - Color change that is detectable at a distance of 6’ to 8’, but which does not seriously<br />
detract from overall appearance of panel.<br />
3. CORE - Innermost layer in veneered construction, normally consisting of several individual wood<br />
pieces edge-glued and end-glued together.<br />
4. CROSS-BANDING - A ply placed between core and face veneer in 5-ply construction.<br />
5. GRAIN - Arrangement of wood fibers and pores evident on cut and/or finished wood products.<br />
Direction, size, arrangement, and appearance of fibers in wood or veneer. Appearance of grain<br />
varies with both species and cut.<br />
6. FACE VENEER - <strong>Out</strong>ermost exposed wood veneer surface of a veneered wood door.<br />
7. FIGURE - Pattern produced, usually across grain, by natural deviations from normal grain.<br />
8. LOCK BLOCK - A concealed block, same thickness as door stile or core, which is adjacent to stile at<br />
a location corresponding to lock location and into which a lock is fitted.<br />
9. MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD (MDF) - Generic name for a panel manufactured from<br />
lignocellulosic fibers combined with a synthetic resin or other suitable binder and bonded together<br />
under heat and pressure in a hot press by a process in which entire bond is created by added<br />
binder.<br />
10. MEDIUM DENSITY OVERLAY (MDO) - A thermosetting resin impregnated paper applied to a door<br />
face to provide optimum surface for a paint finish.<br />
11. OPAQUE FINISH – A paint or pigmented stain finish that hides natural characteristics and color of<br />
grain of wood surface and is not transparent.<br />
12. ORANGE PEEL - In finishing, slight depressions in surface, similar to skin of an orange.<br />
13. PANEL - FLAT - A single or multi-layered (laminated) panel.<br />
14. PANEL - RAISED - A door panel whose faces are raised above edges that are shaped to fit into<br />
grooves in stiles and rails.<br />
15. RAIL - A horizontal structural member of a door.<br />
16. STICKLING - A profile machined in to edges of stiles, rails, mullions, muntins, or bars, adjacent to<br />
panels, glazing materials, or louvers.<br />
17. STILE - A vertical member of a door.<br />
18. TRANSPARENT FINISH – A stain or clear finish that allows natural characteristics and color of grain<br />
of wood surface to show through finish.<br />
A. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit manufacturer’s product data, specifications, and installation requirements for each type of<br />
wood door to be provided for use on this Project.<br />
B. Shop Drawings:<br />
1. Submit shop drawings and schedules indicating location and size of each door.<br />
2. Indicate construction details, fire-ratings, elevations, materials, thickness, door swing, stile and rail<br />
dimensions, veneers, undercuts, locations of finish hardware by dimension and locations/details of<br />
openings and louvers and other pertinent data.<br />
3. Shop drawings submittal shall be coordinated with shop drawings submission of related portions of<br />
Work, such as:<br />
a. Hollow metal doors and frames<br />
b. Hardware<br />
C. Samples:<br />
1. Submit samples for review of color, texture, grain, and finish only. Provide samples in sufficient<br />
number to demonstrate full range of grain, color, texture, and finish expected in final work.<br />
2. Allow for 5 separate submissions of each wood finish for matching control sample provided by<br />
Architect.<br />
3. Fabricate samples using selected flitch.<br />
4. Solid stock samples shall be profiles and types of woods scheduled.<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-2
5. Samples shall represent, in all respects, minimum quality to be furnished by manufacturer. No<br />
work represented by samples shall be fabricated until samples are accepted. Downgrading of<br />
quality demonstrated by samples may be cause for rejection.<br />
6. Submit 2 samples for each wood finish; minimum.<br />
7. Sample Size:<br />
a. Wood Veneer Finishes:<br />
1) Transparent Finish: 18” min. width x 30” min. length<br />
2) Opaque Finish: 12” x 12”<br />
b. Solid Stock Trim: 12” lengths<br />
D. Quality Assurance Submittals:<br />
1. Test Reports:<br />
a. Submit test reports prepared by an independent testing laboratory indicating full<br />
compliance with specified requirements for screw withdrawal, split resistance, and hinge<br />
loading.<br />
2. Certificates:<br />
a. Door manufacturer shall provide a letter, signed by an authorized company<br />
representative, to Architect stating that doors have been manufactured in compliance<br />
with this specification.<br />
3. Manufacturer’s Instructions:<br />
a. Submit manufacturer’s installation procedures which shall be basis for accepting or<br />
rejecting actual installation procedures.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Door manufacturer shall be a company with a minimum of 5 years of verifiable experience<br />
manufacturing wood doors.<br />
2. Wood doors shall be five-ply construction, seven-ply construction does not satisfy this specification<br />
and shall not be acceptable.<br />
3. Single Source Responsibility:<br />
a. To greatest extent possible, wood doors shall be products of a single manufacturer.<br />
b. Veneers for transparent finishes shall be supplied from a single source.<br />
c. Provide secondary materials that are produced or are specifically recommended by<br />
manufacturer of wood doors to ensure uniformity of quality and appearance throughout<br />
Project.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements:<br />
1. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of AWI for materials, fabrication and<br />
machining of wood doors.<br />
2. Fabrication and installation of fire rated wood doors shall comply with ASTM E152 and National<br />
Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and Door and Hardware<br />
Institute (DHI) provisions or standards listed below.<br />
3. National Fire Protection Association:<br />
a. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows<br />
b. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code<br />
c. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door<br />
Assemblies<br />
d. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies<br />
4. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:<br />
a. UL Standard 10C Fire Tests of Door Assemblies<br />
b. UL Standard 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies<br />
5. Door and Hardware Institute:<br />
a. WDHS-3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors<br />
6. Comply with applicable Federal Accessibility Regulations:<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-3
a. Americans with Disabilities Act - ADA<br />
b. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards - UFAS<br />
c. ANSI A117.1 Standard for Accessible and Usable Building s and Facilities<br />
C. Certifications:<br />
1. Fire-rated doors and frames shall bear labels by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Warnock Hersey<br />
International, or other nationally recognized organizations acceptable to authority having<br />
jurisdiction. Provide fire-rated doors with a label permanently attached to either hinge stile or to top<br />
rail, showing testing agency approval for classification scheduled.<br />
2. Door assemblies shall bear fire-rating labels indicating following:<br />
a. Hourly fire rating<br />
b. Temperature rise developed on unexposed surface after 30 minutes of exposure<br />
c. Letter “S” to designate smoke-resistance<br />
d. Name and address of listee<br />
e. Model number of type<br />
f. Symbol, serial or issue number of listing agency<br />
3. Tops of doors shall bear a label from manufacturer indicating door construction, face veneer<br />
species, cut, grade, and finishing information.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:<br />
1. Doors shall be individually wrapped in poly bags. Break seals on-site to permit ventilation.<br />
2. Clearly label each door with opening number where door is scheduled for installation. Use<br />
removable, temporary labels or mark on door surface that will be concealed from view after<br />
installation.<br />
a. Coordinate door identification with shop drawing designations.<br />
3. Handle doors in a manner to prevent damage to exposed surfaces in compliance with WDMA I.S.1-<br />
A, Section G-20 Care and Installation at Job Site.<br />
4. Do not drag doors across one another.<br />
B. Storage and Protection:<br />
1. Store doors in a protected, dry area at least 6” (150 mm) off floor.<br />
2. Stack units so that water cannot accumulate on or within materials, using shims to provide<br />
drainage and air circulation.<br />
3. Protect doors from direct exposure to sunlight.<br />
4. Avoid subjecting doors to extreme heat, dryness, or moisture.<br />
5. Doors that have been scratched, or otherwise damaged shall be removed from Site.<br />
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Requirements:<br />
1. Spaces shall be ready to receive wood doors with temperature and humidity controlled to avoid<br />
damage by excessive changes in atmospheric conditions. Temperature and humidity shall be<br />
stabilized in installation areas at approximate level that will prevail in building when occupied.<br />
Relative humidity shall be not less than 30% or more than 60%.<br />
1.08 SPECIAL WARRANTY<br />
A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering cost to repair or replacement of defective materials or<br />
workmanship for a periods as indicated below from Date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall cover<br />
defects that render doors unacceptable or unfit for ordinary, recommended use, including, but not limited to<br />
delaminating, warping, and core telegraphing through face.<br />
1. Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Five years<br />
2. Solid Core Flush Slab Wood Doors: Life of Original Installation<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-4
B. A representative of door manufacturer shall inspect installed doors and shall note on guarantee that no<br />
provisions of guarantee have been nullified in manufacture or installation.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Flush Slab Doors:<br />
1. Algoma Hardwoods<br />
2. Buell Door Co.<br />
3. Eggers Industries<br />
4. VT Industries<br />
5. Weyerhauser Co.<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. Wood Veneer:<br />
1. Wood Species and Cut: Refer to Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes<br />
2. Grade: Grade AA<br />
a. Veneer grades shall comply with face veneer characteristics established by Hardwood<br />
Plywood & Veneer Association (HPVA) and adapted by Architectural Woodwork Institute<br />
(AWI).<br />
4. Thickness: 1/40” minimum at time of cutting<br />
5. Amount of veneer needed shall be based on a ratio of 3 to 1 (raw face veneer to panel surface<br />
area).<br />
2.03 WOOD DOORS<br />
A. Solid Core Doors: Flush slab; AWI 1300<br />
1. Grade: Premium<br />
2. Core Materials:<br />
a. Non-Rated: PC-5; Particleboard; ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-2<br />
b. Fire Rated: FD-5; Non-combustible mineral core or particle board per label requirements<br />
3. Face Materials:<br />
a. Transparent Finish Doors: Wood veneer<br />
b. Opaque Finish Doors: MDO or tempered hardboard<br />
4. Sizes: As indicated on drawings<br />
5. U.L. Label Rating: As indicated on Drawings<br />
B. Stile and Rail Doors: AWI 1400<br />
1. Grade: Premium<br />
2. Type: As indicated on Drawings<br />
3. Solid Stock: Grade II<br />
a. Wood Species: Refer to Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes<br />
4. Sizes: As indicated on drawings<br />
2.05 FABRICATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Wood door manufacturer shall machine doors for cutouts, hinges, locks and hardware needing<br />
routing and mortising. Perform rabbeting as needed to properly hang doors prior to finishing.<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-5
2. Doors may, at Contractor’s option, be completely pre-fitted for all hardware by door manufacturer.<br />
3. Locate items in compliance with Door and Hardware Institute publication WDHS.3 Recommended<br />
Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. Mounting heights shall be measured from finish floor,<br />
except top butt.<br />
a. Butts:<br />
1) Top: 9 5/8” center of butt to top of door<br />
2) Intermediate: Equal distance between top and bottom butts<br />
3) Bottom: 10 3/8” to center of butt<br />
b. Locksets and Latchsets: 40 5/16” to center of strike<br />
c. Deadlocks: 60” to center of strike<br />
d. Exit Devices: 40 5/16” to center of strike<br />
e. Push Plates: 45” to center<br />
f. Pull Bars (Grips): 42” to center<br />
4. Wood Veneer: Transparent finish<br />
a. Matching of Adjacent Pieces of Veneer: Book match<br />
b. Panel Face Assembly: Center-Balance match<br />
c. Doors in pairs and sets shall be sequence matched.<br />
5. Blocking: Provide either hardwood or structural composite lumber wood blocking in doors or as<br />
required to meet specified fire rating and as follows:<br />
a. Top Rail (No Closer): Minimum 1-1/8 inch.<br />
b. Top Rail (Closer): Minimum 5-inch remaining after installation. Verify with closer<br />
manufacturer.<br />
c. Bottom Rail: Minimum 1-1/8 inch after undercut.<br />
d. Bottom Rail: 5-inch bottom-rail in doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates.<br />
e. Midrail: 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices at location of exit<br />
device.<br />
6. Stiles: Provide stiles consisting of two plys.<br />
a. The inner-ply shall be minimum 1-1/8 inches Structural Composite Lumber (SCL) or<br />
approved non-combustible material on 20 minute rated doors, On 45, 60, and 90 minute<br />
rated doors, the inner-ply shall be 1-inch of Structural Composite lumber or approved<br />
combustible material.<br />
b. The outer ply shall be of hardwood lumber the same species as the face veneer with.<br />
c. Veneer tape will not be permitted.<br />
B. Flush Slab Doors:<br />
1. Vertical and horizontal edges of solid and mineral core doors shall be bonded to core and then<br />
abrasively planed before veneering to ensure minimal telegraphing of core part through veneers.<br />
2. Hot press entire door construction under 85 psi to 125 psi at not less than 240°F to ensure even<br />
glue bonds at door edges and across face.<br />
3. Provide doors with 1 3/4” (35 mm) minimum thickness, 2-ply stile and rail edges outer ply of same<br />
wood species as face veneer; inner ply mill option.<br />
4. Glue lines between face and frame, and between plies of face shall be Type I rigid set adhesive.<br />
5. Non-rated doors shall meet performance criteria as follows:<br />
a. Split Resistance:<br />
1) Not less than 500 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test Method<br />
5.<br />
b. Direct Screw Withdrawal: ASTM D1037<br />
1) Not less than 1,000 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test<br />
Method 10.<br />
c. Hinge Loading:<br />
1) Not less than 1,380 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test<br />
Method 8.<br />
C. Labeled Flush Slab Doors: 45, 60, and 90 minute rated<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-6
2.06 FINISHES<br />
1. Mineral core flush doors shall be securely bonded together utilizing Type I adhesive. Manufacture<br />
doors where temperature and humidity controls will insure a state of equilibrium between<br />
component parts at all times.<br />
2. Core density shall be 26 lbs. per cubic foot (nominal).<br />
3. Provide doors with 2-ply, laminated rail edges of salt free, flame resistant material. <strong>Out</strong>er ply shall<br />
be same wood species as face veneer; inner ply mill option. Securely glue rails to core.<br />
4. Stiles shall be bonded to core and be of salt free, flame resistant material. Stiles shall meet<br />
performance criteria as follows:<br />
a. Split Resistance:<br />
1) Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 900 load pounds when<br />
tested in compliance with Test Method to Determine Split Resistance of Hinge<br />
Edges of Composite Type Fire Doors.<br />
b. Direct Screw Withdrawal: ASTM D1037<br />
1) Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 650 load pounds when<br />
tested for direct screw withdrawal, using a No. 12 x 1 1/4” steel thread-to-head<br />
wood screw of cadmium plated or rust-resistant type<br />
c. Hinge Loading:<br />
1) Not less than 860 pounds when tested in compliance with WDMA Test Method<br />
8.<br />
d. Cycle/Slam: ANSI A151.1, Section 2.5<br />
1) 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of failure<br />
5. Labeled doors shall be manufactured to sizes as needed to provide proper clearances without field<br />
trimming. This procedure shall be followed to assure full thickness of edge bands.<br />
6. Provide salt free non-combustible internal solid blocking for fire doors with mineral core. Arrange<br />
blocking in door so that surface mounted hardware such as, but not limited to, closers, exit device,<br />
etc. may be secured to door without a need for through bolts. A lock block, minimum size 5x12<br />
shall be supplied for bored and mortised locks. Provide top and bottom blocking for attachment of<br />
hardware; minimum size 5”. Provide lock blocks as needed for flushbolts at locations indicated on<br />
hardware templates.<br />
7. Provide metal edges only on pairs of fire doors with two surface mounted vertical rod exit devices.<br />
Other pairs will be furnished with metal edges and overlapping astragal. Metal edges and astragal<br />
shall be veneer wrapped with same specie as door face.<br />
8. Metal astragal for pairs of fire doors shall be formed, pre-machined and veneer wrapped with same<br />
specie as door face.<br />
9. At exit enclosures, provide doors listed for 450°F maximum temperature rise rating for 30 minutes<br />
of exposure.<br />
10. Fire endurance test shall have neutral pressure level established at
B. Shop Applied Finishes: Catalyzed polyurethane AWI 1500<br />
1. Quality Grade: Premium<br />
3. Transparent Finish: AWI System #TR-6<br />
a. Color: Stain to match control sample provided by Architect<br />
b. Sheen (60° gloss meter): Satin; 32° - 36° ASTM D523<br />
c. Effect: Partially filled pore<br />
d. An ultraviolet sun-screening agent shall be added to finish coat to inhibit discoloration<br />
and darkening of mahogany and cherry veneers.<br />
4. Opaque Finish: AWI System #OP-6<br />
a. Color: Match color selected by Architect; refer to Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes<br />
b. Sheen (60° gloss meter): 60 Semi-gloss; 55° - 75° ASTM D523<br />
c. Effect: Partially filled pore<br />
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Fabrication Tolerances:<br />
1. Size:<br />
a. Thickness: ±1/16”<br />
b. Length: ±1/16”<br />
c. Standard Widths: ±1/16”<br />
d. Pre-fit Widths: ±1/32”<br />
2. Factory Hardware Preparation: Comply with tolerances indicated on hardware templates.<br />
3. Warp shall be measured as a distortion in door itself, and shall not refer to door in relation to frame<br />
or jamb in which it is hung. Warp shall not exceed 1/4” in plane of door itself.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Site Verification of Conditions<br />
1. Examine frames and other conditions under which installation of wood doors is to be performed.<br />
2. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper hanging of doors.<br />
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
4. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for<br />
satisfactory performance.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frame in compliance with NFPA No. 80 and 101.<br />
a. Preparation of 20, 45, 60, and 90 minute doors shall be done under label service in<br />
compliance with manufacturer’s service procedure. This includes trimming for size,<br />
except a maximum of 3/4” off bottom of door.<br />
b. Preparation for locks, latches, hinges, closers, lights, louvers, astragal, and any<br />
fabrication shall be done under licensed label service.<br />
2. Hang doors to operate freely, but not loosely, and free from rattling when in latched position. Doors<br />
shall be free from hinge bound conditions, sticking or binding with hardware properly adjusted and<br />
in functioning order.<br />
3. Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance. <strong>Fit</strong> doors tightly against stops. Doors<br />
that are warped, twisted, or which are not in true plane shall be removed and replaced at no<br />
additional cost to Owner.<br />
4. Trim doors width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and<br />
machining.<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-8
5. Trim door height by cutting equally from top and bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4”. Seal cut<br />
surfaces after field-cutting with oil base paint, lacquer, or varnish.<br />
6. Surface mounted hardware items on solid core doors shall be applied with sheet metal screws in<br />
pilot drilled holes.<br />
7. Provide threaded-to-head wood screws for fastening hardware on doors.<br />
8. Pilot holes shall be drilled for screws attaching hinges, lock hardware and other devices to wood<br />
doors. Pilot holes shall not exceed 90% of root diameter of screw.<br />
B. Hanging Tolerances:<br />
1. Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/4” maximum<br />
a. Tolerance shall be measured with a straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over<br />
an imaginary 36” x 84” surface area.<br />
2. Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/4” maximum<br />
a. Tolerance shall be measured with a straight edge or taught string, top to bottom, over an<br />
imaginary 36” x 84” surface area.<br />
3. Width Distortion (Cup): 1/4” maximum<br />
a. Tolerance shall be measured with a straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an<br />
imaginary 36” x 84” surface area.<br />
4. Doors shall not extend beyond 1/16” from face of jamb, or more than 1/8” behind jamb face.<br />
C. Clearances: Subject to ± 1/32” (0.8 mm) tolerance<br />
1. Head and Jambs: 1/8” (3 mm)<br />
2. Meeting Edges for pairs of doors: 1/8” (3 mm)<br />
3. Clearances at Bottom of Fire Doors:<br />
a. Where no threshold is used, allow not more than 3/4” (20 mm) above floor slab.<br />
b. Where a threshold is used, allow not more than 3/8” (10 mm) above threshold.<br />
c. Where floor finish material is used, allow not more than 1/2” (12 mm) above finish<br />
material.<br />
4. Undercut non-rated doors sufficiently to allow clearance above finish floors and where indicated on<br />
Drawings to allow for adequate air transfer. Provide doors with sufficient undercut to allow<br />
clearance above finish floors.<br />
a. Where scheduled floor finish material is less than 1/2” (12 mm) thick allow not more than<br />
5/8” (16 mm) above top of substrate to which it is applied.<br />
b. Where scheduled floor finish material is more than 1/2” (12 mm) thick allow not more<br />
than 1/4” (6 mm) above finish material.<br />
c. Allow not more than 1/4” (6 mm) above threshold.<br />
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Operational Test:<br />
1. After installation of fire doors is completed, operational tests shall be conducted on each door.<br />
2. Tests shall be adequate to determine that system has been installed and functions as intended.<br />
3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION<br />
A. Adjust and check each door to ensure proper operating and function.<br />
B. Replace or re-hang doors that are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely. Replace doors that are<br />
warped, twisted, or which are not in true planes.<br />
C. Replace prefinished doors damaged during installation.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 14 00<br />
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-9
SECTION 08 42 26 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included:<br />
1. Glass entrance doors<br />
2. Sidelights and transom panels<br />
3. Hardware<br />
4. Anchors, brackets, and attachments<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association:<br />
B. Consumer Products Safety Commission:<br />
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials<br />
C. American National Standards Institute:<br />
1. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and<br />
Method of Test<br />
D. Glass Tempering Association:<br />
1. Specification for Fully-Tempered Glass<br />
2. Engineering Standards Manual<br />
E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers:<br />
1. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual<br />
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Design Requirements:<br />
1. Building Movement:<br />
a. System shall be designed to withstand building movements including thermal<br />
movements, loading deflections, shrinkage and similar movements.<br />
2. Doors:<br />
a. Doors shall be designed to withstand operating loads which result from a heavy traffic<br />
condition using selected hardware, without permanent measurable deflections.<br />
b. Limit elastic deflections to provide normal degree of rigidity required to avoid glass<br />
breakage and other objectionable results of excessive flexibility.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided.<br />
B. Shop Drawings:<br />
1. Submit shop drawings for systems. Show anchorage, field connections, and glazing for component<br />
parts and prepare coordination details for entire system including framing and bracing to structure.<br />
2. Shop drawings shall show scale elevations and sections. Full size sections shall be shown only<br />
when needed for clarity.<br />
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 08 42 26-1
C. Samples:<br />
1. Samples submitted shall be of production type and shall represent minimum quality of work to be<br />
furnished by manufacturer. No work represented by samples shall be fabricated until samples are<br />
accepted. Downgrading of quality demonstrated by samples may be cause for rejection of work.<br />
2. Submit 2 samples of finished metal materials:<br />
a. Extrusions: 12" lengths<br />
b. Sheet or plate materials: 6" squares<br />
3. Submit 2 samples of glass; sample size shall be 12" x 12".<br />
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:<br />
1. Submit instructions to be followed in cleaning and maintaining components of system.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. When a product manufacturer is not indicated, provide products from a company specializing in<br />
manufacture with a minimum of 5 years experience.<br />
2. Installer shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of all-glass entrances<br />
and shall demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer<br />
shall employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.<br />
3. Single Source Responsibility:<br />
a. To greatest extent possible, materials shall be products of one manufacturer or items<br />
standard with manufacturer of entrance system.<br />
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements:<br />
1. Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements so work will be accurately<br />
designed, fabricated and fitted to structure. Contractor and manufacturer shall cooperate to<br />
establish and maintain field dimensions.<br />
2. Manufacturer shall be responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and<br />
shall indicate, on shop drawings, required field measurements beyond his control.<br />
1.06 WARRANTY<br />
A. Provide a 1 year written guarantee signed by Contractor and installer agreeing to repair or replace defective<br />
materials or workmanship, including evidence of early deterioration, weathering or aging of work, failure of<br />
operating parts to properly function and other deterioration or failure of work to comply with performance or<br />
other requirements.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 SELECTIONS<br />
A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material selections.<br />
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. All-Glass Entrances:<br />
1. Blumcraft<br />
2. Bogardus Wilson Ltd.<br />
3. Brite Vue Glass Systems Inc.<br />
4. Falconer Glass Industries<br />
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 08 42 26-2
5. Pilkington<br />
6. Tempglass<br />
7. Virginia Glass Products Corp.<br />
8. W & W Glass Products<br />
B. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials:<br />
1. Cadillac Rubber & Plastics<br />
2. Santoprene<br />
3. Morton Thiokol Inc.<br />
4. Rubber Trim Products<br />
5. Tremco Manufacturing Co.<br />
6. Pecora Corporation<br />
7. Williams Products Inc.<br />
C. Sealants:<br />
1. Bostik<br />
2. Dow-Corning<br />
3. GE Silicones<br />
4. Pecora Corporation<br />
5. PTI<br />
6. Rhône-Poulenc - Rhodorsil<br />
7. Tremco Manufacturing Co.<br />
D. Fluoropolymer Coatings:<br />
1. Akzo<br />
2. Glidden Co.<br />
3. Morton International<br />
4. PPG Industries Inc.<br />
5. Valspar<br />
2.03 MATERIALS<br />
A. Glass:<br />
1. Classifications: Primary Flat Glass; ASTM C1036<br />
a. Clear Glass: Type 1, class 1, quality q 3<br />
b. Tinted Glass: Type 1, class 2, quality q 3<br />
B. Carbon Steel:<br />
1. Carbon steel alloys shall conform to requirements of Steel Products Manual and following<br />
standards:<br />
a. Structural Shapes, plates and bars: ASTM A36<br />
b. Sheet and Strip, cold rolled, structural quality: ASTM A611<br />
c. Sheet and Strip, hot rolled, structural quality: ASTM A570<br />
d. Sheet, hot dipped galvanized, structural quality: ASTM A446<br />
e. Sheet, electrolytic zinc coated: ASTM A591<br />
C. Fluoropolymer Coating:<br />
1. Coating material shall contain a formulation of not less than 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin.<br />
2. Color: Custom color to match sample provided by Architect<br />
3. Products:<br />
a. Akzo - Trinar<br />
b. Glidden - Nubelar<br />
c. Morton - Fluorocream<br />
d. PPG - Duranar [XL]<br />
e. Valspar - Fluropon<br />
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 08 42 26-3
2.04 FABRICATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. To greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and<br />
other work before shipment to Project Site. Disassemble components only as necessary for<br />
shipment and installation.<br />
2. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing,<br />
surface treatment and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut edges.<br />
3. Exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design, with joints being<br />
accurately fitted and rigidly secured.<br />
4. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and joining to ensure concealment from view to greatest extent<br />
possible.<br />
B. All-Glass Entrances:<br />
1. Prior to tempering, cut glass to required sizes as determined by accurate measurement of<br />
openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and process edges in<br />
accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat edges in field.<br />
2. Prepare glass panels for hardware by drilling, notching, and edging as required prior to tempering.<br />
3. Glass shall be tempered to increase flexural strength 4 to 5 times strength before treatment.<br />
4. Tolerances:<br />
a. Overall Size of Doors: +1/16"; -1/8"<br />
b. Thickness: ±1/32"<br />
C. Fluoropolymer Coating:<br />
1. Remove die markings prior to finishing operations. Perform this work in addition to finish specified.<br />
Scratches, abrasions dents and similar defects are unacceptable.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
1. Examine substrates and parts of structure affecting installation of work. Do not proceed until<br />
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices at<br />
proper time so as to avoid delays to other work.<br />
B. All-Glass Entrances:<br />
1. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and discard pieces which have<br />
significant edge damage or face imperfections.<br />
2. Clean glazing channel, and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.<br />
Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces<br />
where elastomeric sealants are used.<br />
3. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Install all-glass entrance system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 08 42 26-4
3.04 CLEANING<br />
2. Use a method of attachment to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate<br />
construction tolerances and irregularities.<br />
3. Provide alignment attachments and shims as required to fasten system to building structure.<br />
4. <strong>Fit</strong>, align, and adjust door assemblies plumb and level, to provide a smooth operation.<br />
5. Clearances:<br />
a. Door Head and Jambs: 1/8"<br />
b. Door Sills: 1/4"<br />
c. Butt Glazing Joints: 3/8", except between sidelights and all-glass transoms, which shall<br />
be 1/8"<br />
6. Installation of all glass entrance system shall be capable of withstanding impact from operation<br />
(doors), without failure, including loss or breakage of glass.<br />
A. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces.<br />
B. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to substantial completion. Comply with<br />
glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.<br />
3.05 PROTECTION<br />
A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged.<br />
B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed streamers attached to framing<br />
and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 42 26<br />
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 08 42 26-5
SECTION 08 70 00 - HARDWARE<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included: Door hardware<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided.<br />
B. Shop Drawings:<br />
1. Before fabrication or delivery of hardware, submit 3 copies of hardware schedule.<br />
a. Supplier shall assume sole responsibility for provision, proper coordination and function<br />
of finish hardware required for openings, whether or not listed in schedule below.<br />
b. Architect's acceptance of hardware schedule shall not be construed as a complete check,<br />
nor shall it relieve supplier from responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions from<br />
code requirements, and need to satisfactorily complete Project.<br />
2. Submit 3 copies of keying schedule.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Hardware supplier shall be a company specializing in distribution of contract hardware for a period<br />
of at least 5 years.<br />
2. Supplier shall have, on staff, a full time employee who is a member in good standing of Door and<br />
Hardware Institute and a Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements:<br />
1. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards<br />
2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act<br />
3. National Fire Protection Association:<br />
a. NFPA 80<br />
b. NFPA 101<br />
c. NFPA 105<br />
C. Coordination:<br />
1. Before ordering materials, carefully examine scale, full size, and shop drawings of work requiring<br />
hardware, and verify that material selected will properly fit Work.<br />
2. Coordinate installation of electric hinges, locks, and security devices with installation of electrical<br />
connections.<br />
1.04 WARRANTY<br />
A. Furnish a 2 year factory warranty on door closers against defects in material and workmanship from Date of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Hinges:<br />
1. Hager<br />
HARDWARE 08 70 00-1
2. McKinney<br />
3. Stanley Works<br />
B. Pivot Sets:<br />
1. Glynn-Johnson<br />
2. LCN<br />
3. McKinney<br />
4. Rixon-Firemark<br />
C. Locksets and Latchsets:<br />
Basis of design shall be Schlage; Lever D series, US26D finish<br />
1. Corbin-Russwin<br />
2. Sargent<br />
3. Yale<br />
4. Schlage<br />
D. Closers:<br />
1. Dorma<br />
2. Glynn-Johnson<br />
3. LCN<br />
4. Norton<br />
5. Rixon-Firemark<br />
6. Sargent<br />
E. Push Plates and Pull Bars:<br />
1. Brookline<br />
2. Hiawatha<br />
3. Ives<br />
F. Stops, Wall Bumpers, and Silencers:<br />
1. Glynn-Johnson<br />
2. Hiawatha<br />
3. Ives<br />
G. Roller Latches and Bolts:<br />
1. Glynn-Johnson<br />
2. Ives<br />
H. Sliding/Pocket Door Track and Carriers:<br />
1. Richards Wilcox<br />
2. Stanley Works<br />
I. Thresholds, Door Bottoms, Seals and Stripping:<br />
1. National Guard Products Inc.<br />
2. Pemko Manufacturing co.<br />
3. Reese Enterprises Inc.<br />
4. Zero International Inc.<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Hardware shall be of best grade, entirely free of imperfections in manufacture and finish, and shall<br />
satisfactorily perform various functions required.<br />
2. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor hardware<br />
in position and match hardware as to material and finish.<br />
3. Should any hardware indicated to be installed on fire-rated doors not qualify for appropriate<br />
labeling because of design, or any other reason, notify Architect immediately.<br />
HARDWARE 08 70 00-2
B. Hinges:<br />
1. Provide full mortise, template, 5-knuckle hinges with anti-friction type bearing, conforming to ANSI<br />
A156.1. Doors with closers and doors in excess of 40" in width shall be furnished with hinges with<br />
oil-impregnated or ball type bearings.<br />
2. Exterior and entry doors shall have non-removable pins and extra heavy weight hinges.<br />
3. Doors with locksets shall be furnished with non-removable pins hinges.<br />
4. Hinges shall be furnished in following quantities:<br />
a. Doors up to 90" in height: 1 1/2 pair hinges<br />
b. Doors over 90" in height: Add 1 hinge for every additional 30"<br />
5. Furnish hinge sizes as follows for 1 3/4" thick doors:<br />
a. Doors up to 3'-0" wide: 4 1/2 x 4 1/2<br />
b. Doors 3'-0" to 3'-4" wide: 5 x 4 1/2<br />
c. Doors over 3'-4" wide: Extra heavy 5 x 4 1/2<br />
6. Where 20 minute doors are scheduled without closers, provide spring hinges.<br />
7. Finish:<br />
a. Opaque Finished Doors: As scheduled<br />
b. Transparent Finished Doors: As scheduled<br />
C. Overhead Closers:<br />
1. Surface mounted or concealed overhead closers shall be fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action<br />
with adjustable spring power, and high strength iron cylinder conforming to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.<br />
2. Furnish complete with metal covers, forged steel arms, necessary brackets and thru-bolt fasteners<br />
for top of door surface mounted units.<br />
3. Provide parallel arms where required.<br />
4. Closers shall be sized in accordance with requirements for accessibility for handicapped and<br />
recommendations of manufacturer.<br />
a. Maximum Opening Force:<br />
i) Interior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 5.0 lbs.<br />
ii) Exterior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 8.5 lbs.<br />
b. Estimated Closing Force: (based on 36" door and 60% efficiency)<br />
i) Interior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 3.0 lbs.<br />
ii) Exterior Non-Fire Rated Doors: 5.1 lbs.<br />
5. Finish: Enamel for surface mounted units to match door hardware<br />
D. Exit Devices:<br />
1. Exit devices shall conform to ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 and shall be listed by UL for accident and<br />
hazard.<br />
2. Devices shall be push through type, touch pad design with a straight action pad. Compression<br />
springs shall be stainless steel and internal parts zinc dichromate coated to prevent corrosion.<br />
3. Devices shall be capable of electric latch retraction or electric control of outside trim.<br />
E. Auxiliary Hardware: Conform to ANSI A156.16<br />
1. Interior Stops:<br />
a. Wall-mounted stop where doors strike walls; 1" diameter<br />
b. Floor-mounted stop at locations where wall stops cannot be used<br />
c. Finish: As scheduled<br />
2. Silencers:<br />
a. Tamper proof resilient cushions designed to absorb shock and noise.<br />
b. Provide 3 silencers per single door, and 2 for pairs of doors.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
HARDWARE 08 70 00-3
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
1. Examine doors, frame, and related items for conditions that would prevent proper application of<br />
hardware.<br />
2. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work.<br />
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Securely install finish hardware items in accordance with accepted schedule and templates<br />
furnished with hardware.<br />
2. Finish of exposed fasteners shall match finish of hardware item.<br />
3. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces.<br />
4. Locate items in accordance with Door and Hardware Institute publications.<br />
5. Provide blocking, steel plates or additional studs at all wall door stop locations to absorb impact<br />
and prevent damage to wall surface.<br />
B. Keying:<br />
1. Verify keying requirements with Owner and Tenant.<br />
2. Master and grand master keys shall be delivered to Owner or his representative.<br />
3. Locksets shall be construction master keyed for use during construction.<br />
4. Furnish keys for locks as follows:<br />
a. Grand Master Keys: 6 total<br />
b. Master Keys: 6 per set<br />
c. Change Keys: 3 per lock<br />
d. <strong>Construction</strong> Master Keys: 12 total<br />
3.03 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Final Adjustment:<br />
1. Before final completion, adjust hardware so that doors operate in perfect order. Test and adjust<br />
hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding, or rattling. Adjust closers for proper,<br />
smooth operation.<br />
2. Exposed hardware shall be carefully cleaned by methods not injurious to finish, immediately<br />
preceding occupancy. Replace defective, damaged, or missing hardware.<br />
3. At final completion, properly tag and identify keys and deliver to Owner and/or Tenant.<br />
3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE<br />
A. To define requirements for materials, size, and design, specific products of certain manufacturers have been<br />
listed above. Equivalent products of other acceptable manufacturers listed above may be provided.<br />
B. The Contractor shall engage an Architectural Hardware Consultant to prepare schedules of all hardware<br />
components necessary to suit the particular location and function of the doors indicated in the Drawings and<br />
hardware schedule therein based on the Basis of Design and the descriptions identified on the Hardware<br />
Schedule sheet A601.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 70 00<br />
HARDWARE 08 70 00-4
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included: Glass and Decorative Films as shown on the drawings<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided.<br />
B. Samples:<br />
1. Submit 2 samples of each type of glass other than clear glass; sample size shall be 12" x 12".<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Installer shall be a firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in glazing work similar to<br />
required work.<br />
1. When a manufacturer is not indicated, provide products from a company specializing in<br />
manufacture of glass and glazing products with a minimum of 5 years experience.<br />
2. Installer shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of glass and glazing products<br />
and shall demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer<br />
shall employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements:<br />
1. Comply with recommendations and requirements of following:<br />
a. FGMA Architect's Guide to Glass, Metal, and Glazing<br />
b. FGMA Glazing Manual<br />
c. FGMA - Sealant Manual<br />
d. LSGA - Standards Manual<br />
2. Safety Glazing Materials:<br />
a. Provide glazing at Hazardous Locations as determined by CPSC 16 CFR 1201. Glazing<br />
shall be in accordance with Consumer Product Safety Act and shall have been tested<br />
and labeled.<br />
b. Safety glazing shall conform to requirements of ANSI Z97.1.<br />
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements:<br />
1. Verify field dimensions prior to fabrication. Manufacturer shall be responsible for details and<br />
dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall indicate all required field measurements<br />
beyond his control. Contractor and manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these<br />
field dimensions.<br />
1.05 WARRANTY<br />
A. Upon notification of defects, within warranty period, replace glass and glazing at no additional cost to Owner.<br />
B. Provide written warranties as follows:<br />
1. Laminated and Tempered Safety Glass:<br />
GLAZING 08 80 00-1
a. 5 year warranty period<br />
b. Warranty against delamination (Laminated only)<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 SELECTIONS<br />
A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material selections.<br />
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Flat Glass Products:<br />
1. Cardinal<br />
2. Falconer Glass Industries<br />
3. Guardian Industries<br />
4. LOF Glass, Libby - Owens - Ford Co.<br />
5. PPG Industries<br />
6. Spectrum Glass Co.<br />
7. Sunglas Products Inc. - SPI<br />
8. Tempglass<br />
B. Patterned Glass Products:<br />
1. AFG Industries Inc.<br />
2. S.A. Bendheim<br />
3. Hordis Brothers<br />
4. Rudy Art Glass Studio<br />
C. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials:<br />
1. Cadillac Rubber & Plastics<br />
2. Morton Thiokol Inc.<br />
3. Pecora Corporation<br />
4. Rubber Trim Products<br />
5. Santoprene<br />
6. Tremco Manufacturing Co.<br />
D. Mirror Mastics and Sealers:<br />
1. C.A. Gunther Co.<br />
2. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.<br />
3. Palmer Product Corp.<br />
4. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.<br />
E. Glazing Film:<br />
1. 3M<br />
2. Approved equal<br />
2.03 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendation for selection of hardness, depending upon location of<br />
each application, conditions at time of installation and performance requirements indicated.<br />
2. Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces and other materials contacted in<br />
installation.<br />
2.04 FABRICATION<br />
GLAZING 08 80 00-2
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Cut glass to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bit on glass as recommended by<br />
glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at<br />
manufacturer's option.<br />
2. When glass is to be pre-cut to sizes obtained from shop drawings, take field measurements of each<br />
opening, before glazing to verify adequate bite of glass and minimum edge clearance.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
1. Examine framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and conditions<br />
under which glazing is to be performed.<br />
2. Remedy conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed with<br />
glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and<br />
other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified,<br />
and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise.<br />
2 Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as<br />
possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in same direction as<br />
other pieces.<br />
3. Do not use two different glazing materials in same joint system unless manufacturer of each<br />
material has verified compatibility in writing.<br />
B. Setting Blocks, Edge Blocks, and Spacers:<br />
1. Two setting blocks shall be placed under lower edge of each light of fixed glass. They shall be<br />
sized to limit load from glass to 60 psi, but in no case, less than 4" in length.<br />
2. Setting blocks shall be equidistant from center of glass, preferably at quarter point locations<br />
3. Edge blocks a minimum of 4" long shall be located at both jambs of glass with a minimum of two<br />
per jamb.<br />
4. Spacers shall be one of following two types:<br />
a. Short lengths of elastomeric material, 1" to 3" in length, spaced approximately 24" on<br />
center around perimeter on each side of glass panels to center them in channel.<br />
b. Continuous elastomeric rod, strip, or spline extended around entire perimeter of glass<br />
panel. A hard sealant tape may also act as a spacer.<br />
3.04 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application.<br />
B. Remove non-permanent labels from glass surfaces.<br />
C. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to substantial completion. Comply with<br />
glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.<br />
3.05 PROTECTION<br />
A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged.<br />
GLAZING 08 80 00-3
B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed streamers attached to<br />
framing and held away from glass. Do not apply tape or other markers to surfaces of glass.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 80 00<br />
GLAZING 08 80 00-4
.SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing.<br />
2. Gypsum board and related products.<br />
3. Interior Trim.<br />
4. Aluminum Trim.<br />
5. Sound Attenuation Fire Batt Insulation.<br />
6. Semi-rigid Glass Fiber Insulation<br />
7. Acoustical Sealant.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and C36 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not<br />
defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product provided.<br />
B. Samples: For the following products:<br />
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory provided.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Installer shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of gypsum board products and shall<br />
demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer shall employ, on<br />
Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.<br />
2. Single Source Responsibility:<br />
a. To greatest extent possible, materials, including gypsum board, adhesives, and accessories shall be<br />
products of one manufacturer or items standard with manufacturer of gypsum board.<br />
b. Provide primers and other undercoat materials which are produced or are specifically recommended<br />
by manufacturer to ensure compatibility.<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials<br />
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing<br />
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 1
C. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and<br />
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to<br />
ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual."<br />
D. Installation Characteristics. Gypsum board assemblies shall be installed in accordance with Gypsum Association<br />
Manuals, GA-201, “ Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings”, GA-216, “Application and Finishing of Gypsum<br />
Board”, GA-223, “Gypsum Board Panel Product Types, Uses, Sizes, and Standards”, GA-226, “Application of<br />
Gypsum Board to form Curved Surfaces”, GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual.".<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer<br />
or supplier.<br />
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight,<br />
surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent<br />
sagging.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written<br />
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SELECTIONS<br />
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond<br />
with support system indicated. Material to be provided pre-cut to full wall height where possible to minimize waste<br />
and field cutting of panels.<br />
2.2 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. The following requirements apply for product selection:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.<br />
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.<br />
B. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Steel Framing and Furring:<br />
a. Clark Steel Framing Systems<br />
b. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor.<br />
c. Dietrich Industries, Inc.<br />
d. Marino/Ware<br />
e. National Gypsum <strong>Company</strong>.<br />
f. United States Gypsum Co.<br />
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:<br />
a. G-P Gypsum Corp.<br />
b. National Gypsum <strong>Company</strong>.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 2
c. United States Gypsum Co.<br />
3. Interior Trim:<br />
a. Dale Industries, Inc. – Dale-Incor.<br />
b. Flannery, Inc.<br />
c. G-P Gypsum Corp.<br />
d. National Gypsum <strong>Company</strong>.<br />
e. United States Gypsum Co.<br />
4. Aluminum Trim:<br />
a. Fry Reglet Corp.<br />
b. MM Systems Corporation.<br />
c. Pittcon Industries.<br />
d. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A- Schedule of Materials.<br />
5. Sound Attenuation Fire Batt Insulation:<br />
a. Fibrex.<br />
b. Owens Corning.<br />
c. United States Gypsum Co.<br />
6. Semi-rigid Glass Fiber Insulation:<br />
a. Certain-Teed<br />
b. Johns Mansville<br />
c. Owens Corning.<br />
7. Acoustical Sealant:<br />
a. Bostik.<br />
b. Pecora.<br />
c. Tremco<br />
d. United States Gypsum Co.<br />
2.3 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING<br />
A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.<br />
B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double<br />
strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.<br />
C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:<br />
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and<br />
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by<br />
testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
a. Type: Post installed, chemical or expansion anchor.<br />
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,<br />
with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure,<br />
a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190<br />
by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
D. Hangers: As follows:<br />
1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.<br />
2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel.<br />
a. Diameter: 1/4-inch (6.34-mm).<br />
b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized.<br />
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc<br />
coating.<br />
1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide<br />
flange, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.<br />
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.<br />
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge).<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 3
. Depth: As indicated.<br />
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.<br />
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge).<br />
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.<br />
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web).<br />
2.4 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING<br />
A. Components, General: As follows:<br />
1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.<br />
2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer’s<br />
standard zinc coating.<br />
3. Metal stud partition size, gauge and limiting heights shall be sized for a maximum allowable deflection of<br />
1/240.<br />
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. and<br />
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge).<br />
2. Depth: As indicated.<br />
C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges.<br />
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.<br />
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) (25 gauge).<br />
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.<br />
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).<br />
2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).<br />
F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound<br />
transmission.<br />
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web).<br />
G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide<br />
flange.<br />
1. Depth: 3/4 inch or 1 ½ inch as required.<br />
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of<br />
0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).<br />
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or<br />
double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.<br />
H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or non slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of<br />
7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation<br />
thickness indicated.<br />
I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties<br />
required to fasten steel members to substrates.<br />
2.5 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD<br />
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond<br />
with support system indicated.<br />
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 4
1. Regular Type:<br />
a. Thickness: As indicated.<br />
b. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
c. Location: As indicated.<br />
2. Type X:<br />
a. Thickness: As indicated.<br />
b. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
c. Location: As indicated.<br />
2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.<br />
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel<br />
sheet.<br />
2. Shapes:<br />
a. Corner bead: Use at outside corners.<br />
b. Edge Trim and Finish System:<br />
1) LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel<br />
edges.<br />
2) L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges<br />
where LC-Bead is not adequate.<br />
3) Fast Mask. Use where indicated or in locations selected by contractor.<br />
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.<br />
d. Curved-Edge Corner bead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings.<br />
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated<br />
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221<br />
(ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5.<br />
2. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.<br />
2.7 SOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BATT INSULATION<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C665, Type I<br />
B. Facing: Unfaced, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Thickness: As Indicated.<br />
D. Size: 16” or 24” (as required to fit framing) x 48”<br />
E. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of<br />
preconsumer recycled constitutes a minimum of 20 percent by weight.<br />
F. Products:<br />
a. Fibrex – Sound Attenuation Fire Batt (SAFB)<br />
b. Owens Corning – Sound Attenuation Fire Batt (SAFB)<br />
c. United States Gypsum Co.- Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket (SAFB)<br />
2.8 SEMI-RIGID GLASS FIBER INSULATION<br />
A. General: Comply with UL 723 and ASTM C423<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 5
B. Facing: FSK (foil/scrim/kraft).<br />
C. Thickness: 1” nominal, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
D. Products:<br />
a. Certain-Teed – CertaPro Commercial Board CB-300<br />
b. Johns Mansville – Spin-Glas Board<br />
c. Owens Corning – Fiberglass 703<br />
2.9 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.<br />
B. Joint Tape:<br />
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.<br />
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.<br />
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other<br />
compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.<br />
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type<br />
taping compound.<br />
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use<br />
drying-type, all-purpose compound.<br />
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.<br />
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.<br />
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.<br />
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:<br />
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping<br />
compounds.<br />
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer.<br />
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer.<br />
2.10 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT<br />
A. VOC Content: Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 50,<br />
Subpart D.<br />
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:<br />
a. Bostik, Chem-Calk 600.<br />
b. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.<br />
c. Tremco, Tremflex 834 Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant.<br />
d. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.<br />
e.<br />
C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with<br />
ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building<br />
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.<br />
2.11 AUXILIARY MATERIALS<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 6
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written<br />
recommendations.<br />
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous<br />
substrate.<br />
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch<br />
(0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.<br />
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.<br />
D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:<br />
1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam<br />
displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.<br />
E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors,<br />
and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with<br />
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to<br />
ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling<br />
hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.<br />
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time<br />
needed for coordination and construction.<br />
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:<br />
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to<br />
surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required,<br />
provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.<br />
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of<br />
gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is<br />
required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.<br />
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL<br />
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.<br />
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures,<br />
equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with<br />
details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United<br />
States Gypsum's "Gypsum <strong>Construction</strong> Handbook."<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 7
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural<br />
movement.<br />
1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.<br />
2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at<br />
head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly.<br />
a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated.<br />
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints<br />
independently.<br />
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING<br />
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:<br />
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not<br />
part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss<br />
obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective<br />
means.<br />
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere<br />
with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental<br />
suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension<br />
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced<br />
standards.<br />
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other<br />
devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause<br />
them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.<br />
4. Secure rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews,<br />
or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner<br />
that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.<br />
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that<br />
extend through forms.<br />
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.<br />
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof decks. Attach hangers to structural members.<br />
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.<br />
B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment<br />
are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member and transversely<br />
between parallel members.<br />
C. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated.<br />
D. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the<br />
referenced steel framing and installation standards.<br />
1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.<br />
2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.<br />
E. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical<br />
surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.<br />
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING<br />
A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut<br />
other construction.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 8
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and<br />
wall.<br />
B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where<br />
partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings<br />
and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.<br />
1. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks<br />
or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other<br />
members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to<br />
make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.<br />
a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.<br />
C. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to<br />
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.<br />
D. Curved Partitions:<br />
1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2-inch (50-mm) intervals for arc length. In cutting<br />
lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs.<br />
2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.<br />
3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1-inch- (25-mm-) high-by-thickness of track<br />
metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners.<br />
4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing<br />
recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less<br />
than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.<br />
E. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written<br />
recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;<br />
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.<br />
1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Z-Furring Members:<br />
1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.<br />
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails,<br />
screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.<br />
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner;<br />
on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior<br />
corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.<br />
3.6 INSTALLING SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies<br />
indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions.<br />
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints with furring and other<br />
support.<br />
C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking,<br />
bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar<br />
items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing.<br />
1. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing<br />
strip with 0.0312-inch (0.79-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and<br />
secured behind at least 1 face-layer panel.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 9
D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required<br />
to enclose rods.<br />
E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel<br />
framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call<br />
buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.<br />
F. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while maintaining continuity<br />
of fire-rated construction.<br />
G. Install control joints to maintain fire-resistance rating of assemblies.<br />
H. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and<br />
at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure<br />
differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions or ASTM C 919, whichever is more stringent.<br />
3.7 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL<br />
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.<br />
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels<br />
have been installed on one side.<br />
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end<br />
joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing<br />
member.<br />
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more<br />
than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.<br />
E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum<br />
board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger<br />
vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed<br />
openings.<br />
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges<br />
of stud flanges first.<br />
G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.<br />
H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.<br />
I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.),<br />
except in chases braced internally.<br />
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be<br />
accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.<br />
2. <strong>Fit</strong> gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.<br />
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting<br />
below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and<br />
other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 10
J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to<br />
1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of<br />
gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.<br />
K. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and<br />
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at<br />
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for<br />
locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including<br />
sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.<br />
L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and<br />
manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.<br />
M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.<br />
3.8 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS<br />
A. Single-Layer Application:<br />
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and<br />
at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels either vertically, horizontally, or as indicated or required by fireresistance-rated<br />
assembly, and minimize end joints.<br />
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.<br />
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required<br />
by fire-resistance-rated assembly.<br />
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge<br />
joints over furring members.<br />
B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on<br />
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and<br />
offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless<br />
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.<br />
C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically<br />
(parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least<br />
one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated<br />
assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.<br />
1. Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel<br />
to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member.<br />
Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.<br />
D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.<br />
E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.<br />
F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs,<br />
joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written<br />
recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.<br />
G. Curved Partitions:<br />
1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-<br />
mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 11
2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels.<br />
Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods,<br />
stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels.<br />
3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to<br />
studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve<br />
and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.<br />
4. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center<br />
gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300<br />
mm) o.c.<br />
5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment.<br />
3.9 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels.<br />
Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Control Joints:<br />
1. Break panel behind joint and back by double framing member. Apply acoustical sealant to fill gap and attach<br />
control joint to face layer with 9/16” galvanized staples spaced 6” o.c. on both flanges along entire length of<br />
joint.<br />
2. Install in ceiling areas exceeding 2,500 square feet. Distance between ceiling control joints shall not exceed<br />
50”-0” in either direction. A control joints shall be installed where ceiling framing or furring changes direction.<br />
3. Distance between control joints in partitions and furring shall not exceed 30’-0”, and a control joint occurs in<br />
structure and exterior wall. Partition height door frames may be considered a control joint.<br />
3.10 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface<br />
defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint<br />
compound from adjacent surfaces.<br />
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.<br />
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.<br />
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels:<br />
1. Typical finish level for exposed to view locations where flat paints, light textures or wall coverings are to be<br />
applied:<br />
a. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape,<br />
fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks,<br />
ridges and other blemishes.<br />
2. Typical finish level for exposed to view locations where gloss, semi gloss, enamel or non textured flat paints<br />
are specified; where severe lighting conditions occur or where noted on drawings. Severe lighting may<br />
include overhead or side wall washers.<br />
a. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape. Apply<br />
skim coat to entire surface. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks, ridges and other<br />
blemishes. Apply drywall primer to prepared surface before application of finish paint.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 21 00<br />
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 12
SECTION 09 31 00 - TILE<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following; all of which may not be indicated or required in the Contract Documents.<br />
1. Ceramic mosaic tile.<br />
2. Quarry tile.<br />
3. Paver tile.<br />
4. Glazed wall tile.<br />
5. Porcelain tile.<br />
6. Glass tile<br />
7. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.<br />
8. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations.<br />
9. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as<br />
determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:<br />
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.<br />
2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.<br />
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Verification:<br />
1. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish<br />
required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or<br />
colors approved for completed work.<br />
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.<br />
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.<br />
4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.<br />
C. Contract Closeout Submittals:<br />
1. Submit recommended cleaning and maintenance instructions for tile and grout materials being provided and<br />
include a copy of instructions in Operation and Maintenance Data binder.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Installer shall be a company specializing in tile work with a minimum of 5 years experience. Mechanics used<br />
to set tile shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of tile setting and shall<br />
demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation.<br />
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tiles of same type and color or finish from one source or producer.<br />
1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each<br />
contiguous area.<br />
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar,<br />
adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.<br />
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one<br />
source from a single manufacturer for each product:<br />
1. Stone thresholds.<br />
2. Waterproofing.<br />
3. Joint sealants.<br />
4. Metal edge strips.<br />
E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section<br />
"Project Management and Coordination."<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.<br />
Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.<br />
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.<br />
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.<br />
D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.<br />
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting<br />
backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding<br />
surfaces before setting tile.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and<br />
humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 2
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering<br />
for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, for each type,<br />
composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SELECTIONS<br />
A. See Appendix A – Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and product selections.<br />
2.2 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. The following requirements apply for product selection:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.<br />
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specified products by one of the<br />
manufacturers specified.<br />
B. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Tile Products :<br />
a. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp.<br />
b. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc.<br />
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.<br />
d. United States Ceramic Tile <strong>Company</strong>.<br />
e. Manufacturer Listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
2. Waterproofing:<br />
a. Boiardi Products Corporation.<br />
b. Bostik<br />
c. Compotite Corporation.<br />
d. Custom Building Products<br />
e. LATICRETE International Inc.<br />
f. MAPEI Corporation.<br />
g. National Applied <strong>Construction</strong> Products, Inc.<br />
h. Schluter Systems L.P.<br />
i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.<br />
j. Summitville Tiles, Inc.<br />
k. TEC Specialty Products Inc<br />
l. The Noble <strong>Company</strong>.<br />
3. Setting and Grouting Materials:<br />
a. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp.<br />
b. Boiardi Products Corporation.<br />
c. Bonsal, W.R. <strong>Company</strong>.<br />
d. Custom Building Products<br />
e. LATICRETE International Inc.<br />
f. MAPEI Corporation.<br />
g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.<br />
h. Manufacturer Listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 3
4. Elastomeric Sealants:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation.<br />
b. GE Silicones.<br />
c. Pecora Corporation.<br />
d. Tremco, Inc.<br />
5. Grout Sealer:<br />
a. Bonsal, W. R., <strong>Company</strong><br />
b. Bostik.<br />
c. C-Cure.<br />
d. Custom Building Products.<br />
e. Jamo Inc.<br />
f. MAPEI Corporation.<br />
g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.<br />
h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.<br />
i. TEC Specialty Products Inc<br />
2.3 PRODUCTS, GENERAL<br />
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for<br />
types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.<br />
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in<br />
"Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.<br />
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other<br />
products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide<br />
specific products or materials complying with the requirements of Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in<br />
factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other<br />
packages and match approved Samples.<br />
E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Retain subparagraph below if tile is used in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas. According to<br />
ANSI A137.1, manufacturers must specify whether back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies are suitable for<br />
these installations.<br />
2. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless<br />
tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a<br />
record of successful in-service performance.<br />
2.4 TILE PRODUCTS<br />
A. Trim Units: Match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile<br />
where applicable<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 4
2.5 THRESHOLDS<br />
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.<br />
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2<br />
inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.<br />
B. See Appendix A – Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and product selections<br />
1. Granite Thresholds: Comply with ASTM C 615<br />
2. Marble Thresholds: Comply with ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353<br />
or ASTM C 241.<br />
3. Slate Thresholds: ASTM C 629, Classification II Interior.<br />
2.6 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS<br />
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.<br />
B. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with highstrength,<br />
nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by<br />
0.030-inch (0.76-mm) nominal thickness.<br />
1. Product: Noble <strong>Company</strong> (The); Nobleseal TS.<br />
C. PVC-Sheet Product: Two layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of bondable nonwoven polyester,<br />
for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 0.040-inch (1.01-mm) nominal thickness.<br />
1. Product: Compotite Corporation; Composeal Gold.<br />
D. Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing for adhering to latex-portland<br />
cement mortar; 39 inches (1000 mm) wide by 0.008-inch (0.203-mm) nominal thickness.<br />
1. Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.<br />
E. Corrugated-Polyethylene Product: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations for adhering to latexportland<br />
cement mortar and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 39 inches (1000 mm) wide by 3/16-inch (4-<br />
mm) nominal thickness.<br />
1. Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA.<br />
F. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous-Sheet Product: Self-adhering SBS-modified-bituminous sheet with woven<br />
reinforcement facing for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 36 inches (914 mm) wide by 0.040-inch (1.01-mm)<br />
nominal thickness.<br />
1. Product: National Applied <strong>Construction</strong> Products, Inc.; Strataflex.<br />
G. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber and fabric reinforcement.<br />
1. Products:<br />
a. Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane.<br />
b. LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.<br />
c. MAPEI Corporation; PRP M19.<br />
d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000.<br />
H. Latex-Portland Cement Product: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and acrylic-latex additive.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 5
1. Products:<br />
a. Boiardi Products Corporation; Elastiment 323.<br />
b. MAPEI Corporation; PRP 315.<br />
c. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100.<br />
d. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-324, Triple Flex.<br />
I. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part liquid-applied urethane in a consistency suitable for<br />
trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process.<br />
1. Products:<br />
a. Bostik; Hydroment Ultra-Set.<br />
b. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Deck-Seal 1000.<br />
2.7 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS<br />
A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified below:<br />
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397,<br />
4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick.<br />
2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by 0.062-inch<br />
(1.57-mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.<br />
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.<br />
1. For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph C-4.6.1 in addition to the<br />
other requirements in ANSI A118.1.<br />
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:<br />
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water<br />
must be added at Project site.<br />
2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive.<br />
a. For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to<br />
the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.<br />
D. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials composed as follows, with physical properties<br />
equaling or exceeding those required for thin-set mortars based on testing of medium-bed specimens according to<br />
ANSI A118.4:<br />
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water<br />
must be added at Project site.<br />
2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive.<br />
E. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.<br />
F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.<br />
G. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as<br />
required to produce color indicated.<br />
H. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.<br />
I. Standard Un-sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 6
J. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.<br />
1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.<br />
2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged drygrout<br />
mix.<br />
3. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry<br />
ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged drygrout<br />
mix.<br />
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower.<br />
b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider.<br />
K. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same silicone rubber used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.<br />
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and<br />
characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as<br />
applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic<br />
tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme<br />
temperatures.<br />
1. Products:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.<br />
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.<br />
c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.<br />
d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.<br />
D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as<br />
applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.<br />
1. Products:<br />
a. Bostik; Chem-Calk 550.<br />
b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245.<br />
c. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan.<br />
d. Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.<br />
2.9 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS<br />
A. Refer to Section 09260 for specifications.<br />
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided<br />
or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 7
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal<br />
and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, exposed-edge material. See Appendix A –<br />
Schedule of Materials for material and finish.<br />
C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces,<br />
specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.<br />
D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of<br />
grout.<br />
1. Products:<br />
a. Bonsal, W. R., <strong>Company</strong>; Grout Sealer.<br />
b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer.<br />
c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.<br />
d. Custom Building Products; Grout and Tile Sealer.<br />
e. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Sealer.<br />
f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile.<br />
g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.<br />
h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.<br />
i. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer.<br />
2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT<br />
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.<br />
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to<br />
produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.<br />
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and<br />
within flatness tolerances required below:<br />
a. Mortar Bed:<br />
1) Sub-floor Surfaces: 1/4" in 10'-0"<br />
2) Walls and Ceiling Surfaces: 1/4" in 8'-0"<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 8
. Thin-Set:<br />
1) Sub-floor Surfaces: 1/8" in 10'-0"<br />
2) Vertical Surfaces: 1/8" in 8'-0"<br />
c. Organic Adhesives:<br />
1) Sub-floor Surfaces: 1/16" in 3'-0"<br />
2) Walls and Ceiling Surfaces: 1/8" in 8'-0"<br />
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and<br />
similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.<br />
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated,<br />
adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protection:<br />
1. Protect adjacent surfaces during work of this Section.<br />
2. Close tiled areas to traffic until setting and grouting materials have cured to manufacturer's<br />
recommendations.<br />
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are<br />
incompatible with tile-setting materials.<br />
C. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar that complies with flatness<br />
tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.<br />
1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting<br />
material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material<br />
manufacturer.<br />
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.<br />
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has<br />
been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken<br />
from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend<br />
tiles at Project site before installing.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic<br />
Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation<br />
schedules.<br />
B. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCNA installation<br />
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.<br />
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without<br />
interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without<br />
disrupting pattern or joint alignments.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 9
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.<br />
Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. <strong>Fit</strong> tile closely to<br />
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.<br />
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base,<br />
walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall<br />
area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints<br />
between sheets are not apparent in finished work.<br />
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.<br />
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation<br />
joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after<br />
installing tiles.<br />
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.<br />
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:<br />
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland<br />
cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.<br />
I. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11<br />
and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.<br />
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce<br />
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.<br />
B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.<br />
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing<br />
TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.<br />
1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for<br />
providing 95 percent mortar coverage.<br />
a. Tile floors in wet areas.<br />
b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.<br />
c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.<br />
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:<br />
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).<br />
2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) or as noted on drawings or Appendix A.<br />
3. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) or as noted on drawings or Appendix A.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 10
C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed<br />
above adjacent non-tile floor finish.<br />
2. Installation to conform with TCNA TR 611.<br />
D. Curing:<br />
1. Damp cure tile installations for a minimum of 72 hours.<br />
E. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other<br />
flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.<br />
F. Elastomeric Sealant Joints:<br />
1. Seal joints according to sealant manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
2. Force sealant into joint and against side of joint to make uniform. Fill sealant space completely with sealant.<br />
3. Tool joints to form smooth uniform beads with slightly concave surfaces within 10 minutes after sealant<br />
application. Finished joint shall be uniform in color, smooth, and without pinholes, voids, or low spots.<br />
G. Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Joint Width:<br />
a. Quarry Tile : Same as grout joint; but not less than 1/4"<br />
b. Ceramic Tile: 1/4" preferred; but not less than 1/8"<br />
c. Joints through tile work directly over structural joints shall be same width as structural joint.<br />
2. Install expansion joints as shown or as required by setting method. Conform to TCNA EJ171.<br />
3. Install expansion joints at expansion, control and seismic joints in structure<br />
4. Expansion joints shall be constructed during installation of mortar bed and/or tile. Do not cut joints after tile<br />
installation.<br />
5. Keep joint cavities open and free of dirt, debris, grout, mortar, and setting materials. Set compressible backup<br />
strip when mortar is placed, or utilize a removable wood strip to provide space for back-up after mortar<br />
has cured.<br />
H. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As<br />
soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that have gotten on tile faces by<br />
wiping with soft cloth.<br />
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule,<br />
including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.<br />
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:<br />
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).<br />
2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).<br />
3. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) or as noted on drawings or Appendix A..<br />
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING<br />
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 11
1. Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.<br />
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no<br />
sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and<br />
only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be<br />
cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean<br />
water before and after cleaning.<br />
B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.<br />
Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining,<br />
damage, and wear.<br />
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.<br />
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.<br />
E. Protect walls from impact, vibrations and heavy hammering on adjacent and opposite walls for at least 14 days<br />
following installation.<br />
3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Refer to the following schedule to select method of installation unless TCNA Method No. is indicated on the<br />
drawings. Also comply with Flatness Tolerance specified in 3.1.A.1<br />
INTERIOR FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION METHODS<br />
RECOMMENDED SUB FLOOR RECOMMENDED USES TYPE TCNA Method<br />
No.<br />
Pre-cast concrete floor system At listed sub floors where depressed<br />
Cement Mortar<br />
F 111<br />
Post tensioned concrete floor system<br />
Floor subject to movement or deflection<br />
slab is provided Cleavage Membrane<br />
Slab-on-grade where no bending At listed sub floor where de-<br />
Cement Mortar<br />
F112<br />
stress occur<br />
Slab-on-grade where no bending<br />
stress occur<br />
Above- grade concrete with deflection<br />
not to exceed 1/360 of span<br />
Above- grade concrete or wood subfloor<br />
Above- grade concrete<br />
pressed slab is provided<br />
At listed sub floors in dry areas<br />
only; where no depressed<br />
slab is provided<br />
At listed sub floors in wet areas<br />
where depressed slab is<br />
provided<br />
At listed sub floors in wet areas<br />
where no depressed slab is<br />
provided<br />
Bonded<br />
Thin Set / Organic Adhesive<br />
Cement Mortar Bed<br />
Waterproof membrane<br />
Thin-Set<br />
Waterproof Membrane<br />
LIMITATION: Please be aware that above installations are not for Food or Chemical resistant areas.<br />
F 116<br />
F 121<br />
F 122<br />
3.9 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Refer to the following schedule to select method of installation unless TCNA Method No. is indicated on the<br />
drawings. Also comply with Flatness Tolerance specified in 3.1.A.1<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 12
INTERIOR WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS<br />
RECOMMENDED BACKING<br />
Gypsum Board screwed to metal studs,<br />
single or double layer installed according<br />
to GA-216. Minimum Gypsum Board<br />
thickness – ½”<br />
Cementitious Backer Unit/Fiber Cement<br />
Underlayment.<br />
Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum<br />
Board Backer Board<br />
RECOMMENDED<br />
USES<br />
For dry areas only<br />
For wet or dry areas<br />
For wet or dry areas<br />
TYPE<br />
Gypsum Board Organic<br />
Adhesive<br />
Cementitious Backer<br />
Unit/Fiber Cement Underlayment.<br />
Thin-Set<br />
Membrane in wet areas.<br />
Coated Glass Mat Water-<br />
Resistant Gypsum Backer<br />
Board. Thin-Set<br />
TCNA Method<br />
No.<br />
W 242<br />
W 244<br />
W 245<br />
END OF SECTION 09 30 00<br />
TILE 09 30 00 - 13
SECTION 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included:<br />
1. Suspended metal grid system<br />
2. Acoustical ceiling units<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Installer shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of acoustical ceiling<br />
systems and shall demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation.<br />
Installer shall employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.<br />
2. To greatest extent possible, materials, including acoustical ceiling units, exposed wall moldings,<br />
suspension system, and accessories, shall be products of one manufacturer or items standard with<br />
manufacturer of acoustical ceiling panel units.<br />
3. Cast acoustical ceiling units shall be products of the same run.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements:<br />
1. Fire Rated Assembly:<br />
a. Install fire rated components in strict compliance with requirements of UL. Materials shall<br />
bear UL Classification Marking. No deviations from UL assembly shall be allowed.<br />
1.04 MAINTENANCE<br />
A. Extra Materials:<br />
1. Upon completion of Project, supply Owner with an amount of extra acoustical ceiling units equal to<br />
1% to 2% of total quantity of each type installed. Extra stock shall be provided in clean, clearly<br />
marked cartons for Owner's future use.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 SELECTIONS<br />
A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material<br />
selections.<br />
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Suspension System:<br />
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation<br />
3. USG Interiors (Donn)<br />
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-1
B. Acoustical Ceiling Units:<br />
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Celotex Corp.<br />
3. USG Interiors<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
1. Examine areas and conditions under which acoustical ceiling work is to be performed. Verify that<br />
layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.<br />
2. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work.<br />
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of installation<br />
means acceptance of existing conditions.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as supplemented in this section.<br />
2. Install ceiling system in a true, even plane and in straight courses as indicated on Drawings.<br />
3. Coordinate and fit ceiling components to grilles, lighting fixtures, and other related items. In<br />
determining location and spacing of hangers and primary runners, take into consideration weight of<br />
grilles, light fixtures, etc., that are to be installed in conjunction with acoustical ceilings.<br />
4. Provide stabilizer bars, clips, splices, and edge mouldings required for a complete installation.<br />
B. Suspension System:<br />
1. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members<br />
are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.<br />
2. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected<br />
hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance.<br />
3. Locate system on room axis leaving equal border units.<br />
4. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to<br />
exceed maximum deflection limitations. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located<br />
within 6" of each corner; or support components independently.<br />
5. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.<br />
6. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest<br />
practical lengths. Provide moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Miter corners where wall<br />
moldings intersect, or install corner caps.<br />
C. Acoustical Ceiling Units:<br />
1. <strong>Fit</strong> acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance<br />
and function.<br />
2. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.<br />
3. For tegular or reveal edged units, cut a reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling units at borders and<br />
vertical surfaces.<br />
4. Lay directional patterned units in basket weave pattern. <strong>Fit</strong> border neatly against abutting surfaces.<br />
D. Tolerances:<br />
1. Deflection of grid components shall not exceed 1/360 of span.<br />
2. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8" in 10 feet maximum<br />
3. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members: 2° maximum; caused by eccentric loads<br />
END OF SECTION 09 51 00<br />
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-2
SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following; all of which may not be indicated or required in the Contract Documents.<br />
1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT).<br />
2. Resilient wall base and accessories.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: Submit no less than 2 samples for each type of product selected and of size indicated<br />
below:<br />
1. Tile: full size units.<br />
2. Sheet: 6-by-9-inch (150-by-225-mm) sections of floor covering.<br />
3. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches<br />
(300 mm) long, of each resilient product color and pattern required.<br />
4. Seams: For seamless installation technique indicated and for each flooring product, color, and pattern<br />
required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) Sample applied to a<br />
rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: For sheet floor coverings indicating the floor covering direction and seam locations.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer shall be trained or qualified in installation techniques and procedures of resilient flooring and base and shall<br />
demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer shall employ, on Project,<br />
mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.<br />
B. When Static-control Resilient Floor Covering is specified the Installer must employ workers for this Project that are<br />
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for static-control floor covering installation and seaming method<br />
indicated.<br />
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test<br />
method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 1
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient<br />
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more<br />
than 90 deg F (32 deg C).<br />
1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces.<br />
2. Sheet Floor Covering: Store rolls upright.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more<br />
than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor covering during the following time periods:<br />
1. 48 hours before installation.<br />
2. During installation.<br />
3. 48 hours after installation.<br />
B. After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than<br />
55 deg F (13 deg C) Insert temperature or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).<br />
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation and 48 hours after floor covering installation.<br />
D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed..<br />
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering<br />
for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Floor Tile: Furnish not less than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each color, pattern, and size<br />
of floor tile installed.<br />
2. Sheet Floor Covering: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (152 linear m)<br />
or fraction thereof, in roll form for each color, pattern, and type of sheet floor covering installed.<br />
3. Furnish not less than 5 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of<br />
each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SELECTIONS<br />
A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and material selections.<br />
2.2 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. The following requirements apply for product selection:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.<br />
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 2
B. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile<br />
a. Amtico International Inc..<br />
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.<br />
d. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.<br />
e. Roppe Corporation.<br />
f. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
2. Vinyl Composition Tile<br />
a. Allstate Rubber Corp.<br />
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.<br />
d. Mannington.<br />
e. Tarkett Inc.<br />
f. VPI, LLC.<br />
g. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
3. Rubber Floor Tile<br />
a. Allstate Rubber Corp.<br />
b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.<br />
c. Endura Rubber Flooring.<br />
d. Johnsonite.<br />
e. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.<br />
f. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.<br />
g. Roppe Corporation.<br />
h. VPI, LLC.<br />
i. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
4. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering<br />
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.<br />
c. Congoleum Corporation.<br />
d. Forbo Industries, Inc.<br />
e. Johnsonite.<br />
f. Lonseal, Inc.<br />
g. Mannington Mills, Inc.<br />
h. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.<br />
i. Tarkett Inc.<br />
j. TOLI International.<br />
k. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
5. Sheet Rubber Floor Covering<br />
a. Johnsonite<br />
b. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.<br />
c. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.<br />
d. Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
6. Static-Control Resilient Floor Coverings<br />
a. Static-Dissipative Solid Vinyl Floor Tile<br />
1) AB ElectroStatic, American Biltrite (Canada).<br />
2) Forbo Industries, Inc.<br />
3) Marley Flexco (USA).<br />
4) VPI, LLC.<br />
5) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 3
. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Composition Tile<br />
1) Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;<br />
2) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
c. Static-Dissipative Rubber Floor Tile<br />
1) Nora Rubber Flooring.<br />
2) Pirelli Rubber Flooring.<br />
3) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
d. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering<br />
1) Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.<br />
2) Polyflor/Bonar Floors Inc.<br />
3) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
e. Static-Dissipative Rubber Sheet Floor Covering<br />
1) Nora Rubber Flooring.<br />
2) Pirelli Rubber Flooring.<br />
3) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
f. Static-Dissipative Recycled Rubber Sheet Floor Covering<br />
1) United Technical Products, Inc.; ESD FlexFloor.<br />
2) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
7. Resilient wall Base<br />
1) Allstate Rubber Corp.<br />
2) Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
3) Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.<br />
4) Burke Mercer Flooring Products.<br />
5) Johnsonite.<br />
6) Mondo Rubber International, Inc.<br />
7) Roppe Corporation.<br />
8) VPI, LLC.<br />
9) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
8. Resilient Molding Accessory<br />
1) Burke Mercer Flooring Products.<br />
2) Johnsonite.<br />
3) Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.<br />
4) Roppe Corporation.<br />
5) Manufacturer listed in Appendix A – Schedule of Materials.<br />
2.3 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE<br />
A. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700.<br />
B. Class: As indicated by product designations.<br />
C. Type, thickness and Size: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
2.4 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE<br />
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 4
B. Class: As indicated by product designations.<br />
C. Wearing Surface: As indicated by product designations.<br />
D. Type, thickness and size: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
2.5 RUBBER FLOOR TILE<br />
A. Rubber Floor Tile: ASTM F 1344.<br />
B. Class: As indicated by product designations.<br />
C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per ASTM D 2240.<br />
D. Wearing Surface , type, thickness and size: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
2.6 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING<br />
A. Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913<br />
B. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering With Backing: ASTM F 1303.<br />
C. Color and pattern: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
D. Wearing Surface, Sheet Width and Seaming Method: As indicated by product designation.<br />
E. Seaming Method: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
2.7 SHEET RUBBER FLOOR COVERING<br />
A. Hardness: ASTM D 2240. Not less than 85 Shore A.<br />
B. Slip resistance: ASTM D 2047<br />
C. Static Load Limit: ASTM F 970<br />
D. Color and pattern: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
E. Wearing Surface, Sheet Width and Seaming Method: As indicated by product designation.<br />
F. Seaming Method: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
2.8 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS<br />
A. Static-Dissipative Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A (smooth surface); in<br />
manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) thick.<br />
B. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066 (VCT, non-asbestos formulated), Class 2 (throughpattern<br />
tile); tiles 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 5
C. Static-Dissipative Rubber Floor Tile: ASTM F 1344, except in manufacturer's standard hardness when tested per<br />
ASTM D 2240 using Shore, Type A durometer.<br />
1. Raised-Disc Tile: Class I-A (homogenous rubber, solid color); tiles 39.37 by 39.37 inches (1000 by 1000<br />
mm); 0.20-inch (5.0-mm) overall thickness, 0.19-inch (4.7-mm) base thickness.<br />
2. Hammered-Surface Textured Tile: Class I-B (homogenous rubber, through-mottled pattern).<br />
3. Smooth or Textured Surface Tile: Class I-B (homogenous rubber, through-mottled pattern).<br />
D. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913 (unbacked) or ASTM F 1303, Type II, Grade I, Class B<br />
(nonfoamed plastic backing); in manufacturer's standard roll size; in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less<br />
than 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) thick.<br />
E. Static-Dissipative Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1859, Type I (homogenous); in manufacturer's standard<br />
roll width and length; not less than 0.08 inch (2.0 mm).<br />
F. Static-Dissipative Recycled Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: Manufactured from post-consumer tire rubber; in<br />
manufacturer's standard roll width and length; 0.20 inch (5.0 mm) thick.<br />
G. Static-Control Properties:<br />
1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage.<br />
a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when test specimens are<br />
tested surface to ground.<br />
b. Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when installed floor<br />
coverings are tested surface to ground.<br />
2. Static Generation: Less than 300 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent relative humidity with<br />
conductive footwear.<br />
3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested per FED-STD-101/4046.1.<br />
H. Color: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
2.9 RESILIENT WALL BASE<br />
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.<br />
B. Type (Material Requirement): As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
C. Group (Manufacturing Method): As indicated by product designation.<br />
D. Style, minimum thickness and height: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.<br />
F. <strong>Out</strong>side Corners: Job formed or premolded.<br />
G. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded.<br />
H. Surface: Smooth.<br />
2.10 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 6
A. Description: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
B. Material, profile, color and dimensions: As indicated in Appendix A.<br />
2.11 INSTALLATION MATERIALS<br />
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement<br />
based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.<br />
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Use adhesive that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 50,<br />
Subpart D:<br />
a. VCT Tile Adhesive: Not more than 50 g/L.<br />
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.<br />
C. Static-Control Adhesive: Adhesive product of floor covering manufacturer that produces conductive continuity of<br />
floor covering system.<br />
D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.<br />
1. Color: Match floor covering.<br />
E. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:<br />
1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.<br />
2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.<br />
F. Static-Control Grounding Strips: Provided and approved by floor covering manufacturer and that produce conductive<br />
continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture<br />
content, and other conditions affecting performance.<br />
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections<br />
and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere<br />
with adhesion of resilient products.<br />
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.<br />
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.<br />
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.<br />
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation<br />
only after substrates pass testing.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 7
3. Moisture Testing:<br />
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after<br />
substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of<br />
water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.<br />
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass<br />
testing.<br />
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax,<br />
oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.<br />
D. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access<br />
flooring manufacturer.<br />
E. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.<br />
F. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in<br />
advance of installation.<br />
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.<br />
G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After<br />
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after<br />
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Arrange for manufacturer's representative to oversee installation of static-control resilient floor coverings.<br />
B. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including<br />
built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.<br />
C. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.<br />
D. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Install edge strips<br />
at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.<br />
E. Where movable partitions are shown, install resilient flooring before partitions are erected.<br />
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor<br />
tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.<br />
G. Adhere floor coverings substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed<br />
installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and<br />
other surface imperfections.<br />
H. Immediately after installation of resilient flooring, roll floor in both directions with a 100 to 150 pound, three section<br />
roller to insure full contact between adhesive and flooring.<br />
3.4 TILE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges<br />
of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at<br />
perimeter.<br />
1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless otherwise indicated in drawings.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 8
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and<br />
packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.<br />
1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated in drawings.<br />
C. Static-Control Tiles: In each space where conductive solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance tile<br />
identifying conductive floor tile in location approved by Architect.<br />
3.5 SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS INSTALLATION<br />
A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.<br />
B. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows:<br />
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.<br />
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches (152 mm)<br />
away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.<br />
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.<br />
4. Avoid cross seams.<br />
C. Seamless Installation:<br />
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to<br />
permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce<br />
surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.<br />
2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently fuse sections<br />
into a seamless floor covering. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without<br />
gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on floor covering surfaces.<br />
D. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at<br />
horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.<br />
3.6 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required<br />
in drawings.<br />
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.<br />
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal<br />
and vertical substrates.<br />
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.<br />
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's<br />
recommended adhesive filler material.<br />
F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.<br />
G. Job-Formed Corners:<br />
1. <strong>Out</strong>side Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration<br />
(whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to<br />
length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base<br />
thickness.<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 9
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped<br />
notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to<br />
produce a snug fit to substrate.<br />
3.7 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION<br />
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each<br />
piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.<br />
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:<br />
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.<br />
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.<br />
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.<br />
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.<br />
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and<br />
placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods<br />
recommended in writing by manufacturer.<br />
1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface<br />
blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.<br />
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.<br />
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.<br />
2. Static-control Resilient Floor Coverings:<br />
a. Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings.<br />
b. If recommended in writing by static-control resilient floor tile manufacturer, apply protective staticcontrol<br />
floor polish formulated to maintain or enhance tile's electrical properties to tile surfaces that<br />
are free from soil, adhesive, and surface blemishes.<br />
1) Verify that both polish and its application method are approved by tile manufacturer and that<br />
polish will not leave an insulating film that reduces tile's effectiveness for static control.<br />
3. Prohibit heavy traffic on floor finish for a minimum of 72 hours after installation.<br />
4. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial<br />
Completion<br />
5. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over<br />
flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving<br />
panels.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 65 00<br />
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 10
SECTION 09 68 13 - CARPET TILING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1<br />
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes modular, fusion-bonded tufted carpet tile and resilient molding accessory.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics,<br />
durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:<br />
1. Columns, doorways,enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required<br />
in carpet tiles.<br />
2. Existing flooring materials to remain, where applicable.<br />
3. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.<br />
4. Type of subfloor.<br />
5. Type of installation.<br />
6. Pattern of installation and type of adhesive to be used.<br />
7. Pattern type, location, and direction.<br />
8. Pile direction.<br />
9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.<br />
10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.<br />
11. Transition details to other flooring materials.<br />
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with<br />
manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.<br />
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.<br />
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.<br />
3. Resilient Molding Accessory when required: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for approval and color<br />
selection.<br />
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:<br />
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and<br />
manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.<br />
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.<br />
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.<br />
CARPET TILING 09 68 13 - 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. Installer shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of specified method and shall demonstrate<br />
a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such installation. Installer shall employ, on Project,<br />
mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.<br />
2. Single Source Responsibility:<br />
a. To greatest extent possible, materials shall be products of one manufacturer or items standard with<br />
manufacturer of carpet tile.<br />
b. Provide primers and other undercoat materials which are produced or are specifically recommended<br />
by manufacturer of adhesives to ensure compatibility of system.<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated by each<br />
specified carpet tile manufacturer, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent<br />
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
C. Provide products that comply with the Consumer Product Safety Commission CPSC FF-1 Surface Flammability of<br />
Carpets and Rugs.<br />
D. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."<br />
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient<br />
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended<br />
use.<br />
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive<br />
and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.<br />
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles<br />
before installing these items.<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace<br />
components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate,<br />
vandalism, or abuse.<br />
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs,<br />
loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination.<br />
CARPET TILING 09 68 13 - 2
3. Provide a written warranty covering repair or replacement of defective materials and workmanship for a<br />
period of 2 years from Date of Substantial Completion. Reinstall carpet that is wrinkled and correct seam<br />
failures and other conditions due to faulty installation at no additional cost to Owner.<br />
4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are<br />
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m) for each type indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SELECTIONS OF CARPET TILE<br />
A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Materials for supplemental information and material selections.<br />
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or<br />
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.<br />
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor<br />
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by<br />
carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.<br />
C. Resilient Molding Accessories:<br />
Unless otherwise specified in Appendix A – Resilient Molding Accessories; provide the following moldings when required.<br />
Color: to be selected by the Architect.<br />
1. Carpet Edge Strip:<br />
a. Flexco - #184, Edge Guard<br />
b. Johnsonite - #EG-XX-L, Edge Guard<br />
c. Burkemercer - #700, Imperial Reducer<br />
d. Roppe - #39, Carpet Edge<br />
2. Carpet Reducer Strip:<br />
a. Flexco - #177B, Carpet Reducer<br />
b. Johnsonite - CRS-XX-B, Reducer<br />
c. Burkemercer - #146, Universal Reducer<br />
d. Roppe - #26, Reducer Strip<br />
3. Joiner Strip:<br />
a. Flexco - #167, Tile & Carpet Joiner<br />
b. Johnsonite - CTA-XX-A, Carpet-to-Tile Adaptor<br />
c. Burkemercer - #700, Imperial Reducer<br />
d. Roppe - #50 Tile/Carpet Joiner<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
CARPET TILING 09 68 13 - 3
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum<br />
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.<br />
Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.<br />
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:<br />
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may<br />
interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and<br />
moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.<br />
2. Subfloor are level with a maximum surface variation of ¼” in 10 feet non-cumulative.<br />
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.<br />
C. For wood subfloors, verify the following:<br />
1. Subfloor are level with a maximum surface variation of ¼” in 10 feet non-cumulative.<br />
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show<br />
through surface.<br />
D. For metal subfloors, verify the following:<br />
1. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show<br />
through surface.<br />
E. For painted subfloors, verify the following:<br />
1. Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer.<br />
F. For raised access flooring systems, verify the following:<br />
1. Access floor complies with requirements specified in Division 10 Section "Access Flooring."<br />
2. Access floor substrate is compatible with carpet tile and adhesive if any.<br />
3. Underlayment surface is flat, smooth, evenly planed, tightly jointed, and free of irregularities, gaps greater<br />
than 1/8 inch (3 mm), protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), and substances that may interfere with<br />
adhesive bond or show through surface.<br />
G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's<br />
written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.<br />
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks,<br />
holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide<br />
or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that<br />
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by<br />
carpet tile manufacturer.<br />
CARPET TILING 09 68 13 - 4
D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand<br />
painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately<br />
before applying adhesive.<br />
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer; unless otherwise specified in Appendix<br />
A.<br />
C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.<br />
D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets,<br />
pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile<br />
manufacturer.<br />
E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves,<br />
and similar openings.<br />
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish<br />
flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.<br />
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.<br />
H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access<br />
flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:<br />
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet<br />
tile manufacturer.<br />
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.<br />
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.<br />
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."<br />
C. Do not use Carpet Mask for carpet protection; it voids carpet tile manufacturer’s warranty.<br />
D. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the<br />
remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile<br />
manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 68 13<br />
CARPET TILING 09 68 13 - 5
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included:<br />
1. Work required under this section consists of surface preparation, priming, painting, and finishing<br />
work necessary to complete Work indicated or reasonably implied on Drawings.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit a complete list of products proposed for use, including identifying product names and<br />
catalog numbers.<br />
B. Samples:<br />
1. Submit 2 samples of each color and material selected.<br />
2. Samples shall be submitted on 12" x 12" hardboard and shall be labeled on back, identifying color<br />
name and number, manufacturer, and product name.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications:<br />
1. When a product manufacturer is not indicated, provide products from a company specializing in<br />
manufacture with a minimum of 5 years experience.<br />
2. Applicator shall be trained in installation techniques and procedures of painting materials and shall<br />
demonstrate a minimum of 3 years successful experience in such application. Applicator shall<br />
employ, on Project, mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements:<br />
1. Conform to applicable codes and ordinances for flame, fuel, smoke, and volatile organic compound<br />
(VOC) ratings requirements for finishes at time of application.<br />
1.04 FIELD SAMPLE<br />
A. Requirements:<br />
1. Contractor shall schedule meeting with Architect to review the first finished items. Review shall be<br />
scheduled so as not to impede the progress of the project but shall occur prior to purchase of<br />
materials.<br />
2. The first finished items of each color will be reviewed for color, texture and workmanship.<br />
3. The first acceptable item of each color will be used as the project standard.<br />
4. Field Samples shall be no smaller than 100 sq.ft.. Where two or more colors / finishes adjoin<br />
provide 100 sq. ft. of each. Provide as many adjoining materials as possible; ceiling tile, base,<br />
carpet, etc..<br />
1.05 MAINTENANCE<br />
A. Extra Materials:<br />
1. Provide, in manufacturer's unopened original containers, 1 gallon of each top coat color and store<br />
where directed by Owner. These containers will constitute extra stock for Owner's future<br />
maintenance needs.<br />
2. Label each container with room locations in addition to manufacturer's label.<br />
PAINTING 09 91 00-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 SELECTIONS<br />
A. See Appendix A - Schedule of Finishes for supplemental information and material<br />
selections.<br />
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Painting and Finishing Materials:<br />
1. Benjamin Moore<br />
2. Duron<br />
3. Glidden<br />
4. Pittsburgh Paints<br />
5. Sherwin Williams<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
1. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished for conditions that will adversely affect execution,<br />
permanence, or quality of Work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through<br />
preparatory work.<br />
2. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes<br />
until moisture content of surface is below following limits:<br />
a. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12% maximum<br />
b. Unit Masonry and Concrete: 12% maximum<br />
c. Interior Wood: 15% maximum; in accordance with ASTM D2016<br />
d. Exterior Wood: 15% maximum; in accordance with ASTM D2016<br />
3. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.<br />
Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protection:<br />
1. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. Remove<br />
empty paint and coatings containers from Premises.<br />
2. Place cotton waste, cloths and other hazardous materials in containers, and remove from Premises<br />
daily.<br />
3. Provide drop cloths, shields, and other protective equipment.<br />
4. Protect elements surrounding work of this section from damage or disfiguration.<br />
5. As Work proceeds, promptly remove spilled, splashed, or splattered materials from surfaces.<br />
B. Surface Preparation:<br />
1. General Requirements:<br />
a. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, registers,<br />
surface hardware, and fittings prior to starting.<br />
b. Surfaces to be painted or finished shall be clean, dry, smooth and free from dust and<br />
foreign matter which will adversely affect adhesion or appearance.<br />
c. Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.<br />
PAINTING 09 91 00-2
3.03 APPLICATION<br />
d. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with a tri-sodium phosphate<br />
bleach solution acceptable to paint manufacturer. Rinse area with clean, clear water;<br />
allow surface to thoroughly dry.<br />
2. Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces:<br />
a. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound.<br />
b. Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes; dampen with clean, clear water and fill with thin<br />
layers of joint cement.<br />
3. Previously Painted Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces:<br />
a. Surface defects shall be filled, sanded, and spot primed. Cracks and holes shall be cut<br />
back and doubled filled, sanded, and spot primed.<br />
b. Remove cracking, flaking, and peeling paint by light sanding and spot prime.<br />
c. Glossy surfaces shall be sanded or otherwise treated prior to application of coating<br />
systems.<br />
4. Metal Surfaces:<br />
a. Surfaces must be free of residual deposits of grease, rust, scale, dirt, dust, and oil.<br />
b. For shop primed surfaces, sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather<br />
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces.<br />
c. For surfaces not shop primed, remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Surfaces shall be<br />
cleaned with hand or power tools to produce a clean, smooth surface. Where heavy<br />
coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or abrasive grit blasting.<br />
Immediately apply prime coat as scheduled.<br />
d. Prepare surfaces of hollow metal doors and frames including tops, bottoms, and surfaces<br />
normally concealed from view as described above.<br />
5. Previously Finished MetalSurfaces:<br />
a. Remove surface contamination by solvent cleaning, steam or high pressure water to<br />
remove contamination and oils. Scrape and sand to remove loose paint. Feather edges<br />
to make patches inconspicuous.<br />
b. Surfaces shall be dulled by sanding. The surface shall be blown off with compressed air.<br />
6. Cast-In-Place and/or Precast Concrete Surfaces:<br />
a. Allow concrete to cure for 60 to 90 days prior to painting.<br />
b. Remove loose particles with stiff brush.<br />
c. Remove dirt, scale, efflorescence, powders, laitance, parting compounds, and other<br />
foreign matter.<br />
d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to<br />
dry.<br />
e. Wash stains caused by weathering or corroding metals with a sodium metasilicate<br />
solution after thoroughly wetting with clean, clear water; allow surface to thoroughly dry.<br />
f. Fill small surface pock marks and air holes with an exterior latex base prime and fill<br />
material. Thoroughly brush or rub over surface and let dry for not less than 24 hours<br />
before applying paint.<br />
7. Wood Surfaces:<br />
a. Sand wood surfaces and edges smooth and even before finishing or painting and<br />
between coats. Remove dust after each sanding.<br />
b. Remove residue from knots, pitch streaks, cracks, open joints and sappy spots. Knots<br />
shall be coated with a pigmented stain sealer prior to painting. Avoid use of shellac as<br />
an undercoat.<br />
c. Countersink nails and fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with tinted putty<br />
or wood filler after priming is dry and before second coat.<br />
d. Prior to installation, apply backprime to woodwork scheduled to receive a field applied<br />
painted finish.<br />
e. Seal top, bottom, and edges of wood doors to be painted with primer.<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
PAINTING 09 91 00-3
1. Number of coats specified are minimum number acceptable. Sand lightly between coats to<br />
achieve required finish. Apply additional coats as necessary to provide a smooth, even application<br />
.<br />
2. Use deep base primers where required.<br />
3. Vary slightly color of successive paint coats. Allow each coat of paint, varnish and enamel to dry<br />
thoroughly before applying succeeding coats.<br />
4. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping.<br />
5. Finish closets same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified.<br />
6. Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors same as faces of doors.<br />
7. Paint surfaces above ceilings and inside partitions, flat black, behind grilles and registers which are<br />
exposed to view or which reflect light.<br />
8. Paint mechanical items as follows:<br />
a. Paint, flat black, interior of ducts behind grilles and registers.<br />
b. Do not paint name plates or polished surfaces of equipment. Leave clean and free of<br />
paint.<br />
c. Paint hangers and supports for pipes in exposed areas.<br />
3.04 ADJUSTING<br />
A. At completion of Work, touch-up and restore finishes where damaged.<br />
B. Defects in Finished Surfaces:<br />
1. When stain, dirt, or undercoats show through final coat of paint, correct defects and cover with<br />
additional coats until coating or paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage.<br />
2. Correct defects visible from a distance of 5 feet. Runs shall not be permitted.<br />
3. Refinish whole wall where a portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.<br />
3.05 CLEANING<br />
A. At completion of day's work, remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials.<br />
B. Clean paint spots, oil and other soiling from prefinished surfaces and surfaces with integral finish. Use<br />
solvents for metal work which will not damage finished surface.<br />
C. Leave storage area clean and in same condition required for equivalent spaces in Project.<br />
3.06 SCHEDULE OF PAINT FINISHES<br />
A. Unless noted otherwise the following list of systems is to be used on this project. To define requirements for<br />
materials this specification lists a single product manufactured by a specific manufacturer. Similar products<br />
by other manufacturers listed above may be provided.<br />
B. Interior Coating Systems:<br />
1. Gypsum Board [Ceilings]: Flat finish<br />
a. First Coat: Latex Quick Dry Primer #201<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal Wall Satin #215<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
2. Gypsum Board [Walls]: Eggshell finish<br />
a. First Coat: Latex Quick Dry Primer #201<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal Aquavelvet #319<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
3. Previously Painted Gypsum Board:<br />
Same systems as above except primer only required at repairs.<br />
4. Wood: Natural finish<br />
a. First Coat: Quick dry Sanding Sealer #413<br />
b. Second Coat: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404<br />
PAINTING 09 91 00-4
c. Third Coat: same as second if required<br />
5. Wood: Transparent finish<br />
a. First Coat: Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain #241<br />
b. Second Coat: Quick dry Sanding Sealer #413<br />
c. Third Coat: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404<br />
6. Wood: Semi-Gloss opaque finish<br />
a. First Coat: Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal AquaGlo #333<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
7. Ferrous Metals: Eggshell finish<br />
a. First Coat: IronClad Retard-X-Rust Inhibitive Latex Primer #162<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal Aquavelvet #319<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
8. Ferrous Metals: Semi-gloss finish<br />
a. First Coat: IronClad Retard-X-Rust Inhibitive Latex Primer #162<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal AquaGlo #333<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
9. Galvanized Metals: Eggshell finish<br />
a. First Coat: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal Aquavelvet #319<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
10. Galvanized Metals: Semi-gloss finish<br />
a. First Coat: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal AquaGlo #333<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
11. Aluminum: Eggshell finish<br />
a. First Coat: IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint #163<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal Aquavelvet #319<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
12. Aluminum: Semi-gloss finish<br />
a. First Coat: IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint #163<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal AquaGlo #333<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
13. Concrete Unit Masonry: Eggshell finish<br />
a. First Coat: MoorCraft Super-Hide Latex Block Filler #285<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal Aquavelvet #319<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
14. Concrete Unit Masonry: Semi-gloss finish<br />
a. First Coat: MoorCraft Super-Hide Latex Block Filler #285<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal AquaGlo #333<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
15. Brick Masonry, Plaster, and Concrete: Eggshell finish<br />
a. First Coat: Latex Enamel Underbody #345<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal Aquavelvet #319<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
16. Brick Masonry, Plaster, and Concrete: Semi-gloss finish<br />
a. First Coat: Latex Enamel Underbody #345<br />
b. Second Coat: Regal AquaGlo #333<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
17. Concrete Floors: (reduce first coat according to label directions)<br />
a. First Coat: Latex Floor & Patio Finish #122<br />
b. Second Coat: same as first<br />
c. Third Coat: same as second<br />
END OF SECTION 09 91 00<br />
PAINTING 09 91 00-5
SECTION 11 31 00 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work Included:<br />
1. Kitchen appliances<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided.<br />
B. Quality Control Submittals:<br />
1. Manufacturer's Instructions:<br />
a. Submit manufacturer's installation procedures which shall be basis for accepting or<br />
rejecting actual installation procedures.<br />
C. Contract Closeout Submittals:<br />
1. Submit instructions for cleaning and maintaining appliances. Include a copy of instruction in<br />
Operation and Maintenance Data Manual.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Residential Appliances:<br />
1. Amana<br />
2. ISE; In-Sink-Erator<br />
3. General Electric<br />
4. Kitchen-Aid Inc.<br />
5. Maytag<br />
6. Thermador/Waste King<br />
7. Whirlpool Corp.<br />
8. Manufacturers identified in Appendix B<br />
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS<br />
A. Refer to Appendix B for schedule of Equipment.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
1. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this section is to be performed; correct<br />
conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work.<br />
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-1
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper and adequate provisions are made for interface with this<br />
portion of Work.<br />
B. Install appliances in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor components firmly into<br />
position in proper relation to work surfaces, floors, etc.<br />
3.04 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Touch-up scratches and abrasions to be completely invisible to unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet.<br />
B. Upon completion of installation and hook-up to utilities, put operating components of appliances through at<br />
least 5 complete operating cycles, adjusting as necessary to secure optimum level of operation.<br />
3.05 CLEANING<br />
A. Promptly remove from Site, cartons and packing material associated with work of this section.<br />
END OF SECTION 11 31 00<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-2
DGS OJS <strong>DSLBD</strong><br />
ONE JUDICIARY SQUARE, 8 TH FLOOR<br />
APPENDIX A<br />
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS<br />
1.01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK - Section 06 40 00<br />
A. Plastic Laminate Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): PLAM-01<br />
a. Manufacturer: Formica<br />
b. Color: Glamour Cherry 6208-43<br />
c. Finish: Artisan Finish<br />
2. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): PLAM-02<br />
a. Manufacturer: Formica<br />
b. Color: White Drops 8824-58<br />
c. Finish: Matte Finish<br />
3. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): PLAM-03<br />
a. Manufacturer: Formica<br />
b. Color: Stop Red 8390-58<br />
c. Finish: Matte Finish<br />
4. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): PLAM-04<br />
a. Product: Melamine<br />
b. Color: White<br />
c. Finish: Matte Finish<br />
B. Cabinetry Hardware:<br />
1. Door /Drawer Pulls<br />
a. Type: Hafele<br />
b. Size: 50mm (2” nom.) center to center<br />
c. Finish: Polished Chrome<br />
d. Product: #124.02.220<br />
2.01 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS – Section 06 40 00<br />
A. Solid Surface Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): SS-01<br />
a. Manufacturer: DuPont<br />
b. Product: Corian<br />
c. Color: Witch Hazel<br />
3.01 GLAZING - Section 08 80 00<br />
A. Glazing Film Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): MF-1<br />
a. Manufacturer: 3M<br />
b. Product: Fasara Glass Decorative Films<br />
c. Type: Yamato SH2PT YA<br />
OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS 05.08.13<br />
Appendix A-1
B. Glass Type Selection:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): GL-1<br />
a. Thickness: ½”<br />
b. Type: Clear Tempered<br />
c. Color: None<br />
4.01 TILE – Section 09 31 00<br />
A. Ceramic Tile Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): CT-1<br />
a. Manufacturer: Architectural Ceramics<br />
b. Product: VitraArt Tranquil Glass Mosaics<br />
c. Composition: Glass<br />
d. Color: 50C1 040M IPC<br />
e. Grout Color: TBD – Contractor to provide samples for approval<br />
f. Size: 2”x2”<br />
5.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS - Section 09 51 00<br />
A. Acoustical Ceiling Type Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): ACT-1<br />
a. Manufacturer: Armstrong<br />
b. Type: Match to Building Standard<br />
c. Size: 24” x 24”<br />
d. Grid: Match to Building Standard<br />
6.01 RESILIENT FLOORING - Section 09 65 00<br />
A. Vinyl Floor Tile Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): VCT-1<br />
a. Manufacturer: Armstrong<br />
b. Product: Striations BBT with BioStride<br />
c. Size: 12” x 24”<br />
d. Thickness: 1/8”<br />
e. Color: T3614 Bisque<br />
f. Lead Time: 4 weeks from order if not in stock<br />
2. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): VCT-2<br />
g. Manufacturer: Armstrong<br />
h. Product: Migrations BBT with BioStride<br />
i. Size: 12” x 12”<br />
j. Thickness: 1/8”<br />
k. Color: T3503 Ashen Gray<br />
B. Resilient Molding Accessory Selections:<br />
3. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): TR-1(Carpet to VCT)<br />
a. Manufacturer: Schulter<br />
b. Profile: Schiene<br />
c. Color: Stainless Steel 304<br />
7.01 RESILIENT BASE - Section 09 65 00<br />
OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS 05.08.13<br />
Appendix A-2
A. Resilient Base Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): RB-1<br />
a. Manufacturer: Johnsonite<br />
b. Type: Ecolibrium, Rubber Base<br />
c. Height: 4”<br />
d. Color: Grey Haze WG<br />
Note: Straight Resilient Base to be used over broadloom carpet. Cove Resilient Base to be used over<br />
resilient flooring.<br />
8.01 CARPET TILING – Section 09 68 13<br />
A. Carpet Tile Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): CPT-1<br />
a. Manufacturer: Lees Carpet<br />
b. Style: Enthralled GT153<br />
c. Color: 954 Dazzled<br />
d. Size: 24” x 24”<br />
e. Install: Quarter Turn<br />
f. Contact: Chick Mandeville, chick_mandeville@mohawkind.com,<br />
703.818.8703 office / 202.251.8797 mobile<br />
2. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): CPT-2<br />
a. Manufacturer: Lees Carpet<br />
b. Style : CL759<br />
c. Color: B8098<br />
d. Size: 24” x 24”<br />
e. Installation: Quarter Turn<br />
f. Contact: Chick Mandeville, chick_mandeville@mohawkind.com,<br />
703.818.8703 office / 202.251.8797 mobile<br />
B. Carpet Installation:<br />
1. Direct Glue<br />
9.01 PAINTING - Section 09 91 00<br />
A. Paint Color Selections:<br />
1. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): P-1<br />
a. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore<br />
b. Color: Wedding Veil 2125-70<br />
c. Finish: Eggshell<br />
2. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): P-2<br />
a. Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams<br />
b. Color: SW6531 Indigo<br />
c. Finish: Eggshell<br />
3. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): P-3<br />
a. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore<br />
b. Color: Acadia White OC-38<br />
c. Finish: Eggshell<br />
OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS 05.08.13<br />
Appendix A-3
4. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): P-4<br />
a. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore<br />
b. Color: Yellow Lotus 2021-50<br />
Finish: Eggshell<br />
5. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): P-5<br />
a. Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams<br />
b. Color: SW7007 Ceiling Bright White<br />
c. Finish: Flat<br />
6. Drawing Designation (abbreviation): P-6<br />
a. Manufacturer:<br />
b. Color:<br />
c. Finish:<br />
Note: All wall gypsum surfaces shall have an eggshell finish unless noted otherwise. All ceiling<br />
gypsum surfaces shall have a flat finish.<br />
10.01 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS - Section 10 65 20<br />
B. Operable Panel Partitions:<br />
Selection:<br />
a. Manufacturer: Hufcor<br />
b. Type: Series 632 Paired Panels<br />
Paired panel system w/ fabric face<br />
Manual Folding Panel Parition<br />
STC – 45 -47<br />
3” Top Sweep Seal and Bottom Retractable Horizontal<br />
Seal<br />
c. Panel Finish: Revelations, Matrix Moonstone 100-12<br />
Class ‘A’, UBC 8-2/42-2 Latex Backing, Teflon<br />
50 Yard Rolls, 54” Width<br />
d. Frame Finish: Gray<br />
e. Location: 870 & 871 Project Rooms<br />
END OF APPENDIX<br />
OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS 05.08.13<br />
Appendix A-4
DGSOJS <strong>DSLBD</strong><br />
ONE JUDICIARY SQUARE, 8 TH FLOOR<br />
APPENDIX B<br />
SCHEDULE OF APPLIANCES<br />
1.01 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES – Section 11 31 00<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. To define requirements for materials, size, and design, products of certain manufacturers<br />
have been listed. Equivalent products by manufacturers listed in Section 11 31 00 may<br />
be provided.<br />
B. Microwave:<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 01<br />
2. Manufacturer: Whirlpool<br />
3. Model No.: GT4175SPS<br />
4. Size: 13 17/32" h x 22 19/32” w x 17 5/16" d<br />
5. Color: Stainless Steel<br />
6. QTY: 2, Suite 850<br />
C. Garbage Disposal:<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 02<br />
2. Manufacturer: GE 1 Horsepower Continuous Feed Disposer<br />
3. Model No.: GFC1020F<br />
4. Horsepower: 1 HP<br />
5. Motor Speed: 2800 RPM<br />
6. Location: Suite 850<br />
D. Full Size Refrigerator with Icemaker and Water Filter:<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 03<br />
2. Manufacturer: Whirlpool<br />
3. Model No.: GB2FHDXWD<br />
4. Size: 32 5/8" W x 33 3/8"D x 69 15/16"H<br />
5. Color: Stainless Steel<br />
6. Door Edge Clearance: 4 ½” with handle, from wall<br />
7. Installation Clearance: Sides 1/8”, Top 1”, Back 1”<br />
8. Location: Suite 850<br />
E. Under Counter ADA Refrigerator:<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 04<br />
2. Manufacturer: Uline<br />
3. Model No.: ADA24RS-15 (Left Handed)<br />
4. Size: 23 15/16” W x 32”H x 23 ½”D<br />
5. Color: Stainless Steel<br />
6. Door Edge Clearance: 4 ½” with handle, from wall<br />
7. Installation Clearance: Refer to manufacturer specifications and coordinate w/ millworker<br />
8. Location: Suite 805<br />
F. Sink:<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 05<br />
2. Manufacturer: Elkay<br />
3. Model No.: Lustertone under mount single bowl ELUGAD Series_ADA<br />
Compliant<br />
4. Size: 21 ½” x 18 ½” x 5 ½”<br />
OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT 05.08.13<br />
Appendix B-1
5. Color: Stainless Steel<br />
6. QTY: 1, Suite 850<br />
G. Faucet ADA:<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 06<br />
2. Manufacturer: Kohler, Simplice Pull-Down Kitchen Sink Faucet - ADA<br />
3. Model No.: K-647<br />
4. Size:<br />
5. Color: VS- Stainless Steel<br />
7. QTY: 1, Suite 850<br />
H. NOT USED:<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 07<br />
2. Manufacturer:<br />
3. Model No.:<br />
4. Size:<br />
5. Color:<br />
I. NOT USED<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 08<br />
2. Manufacturer:<br />
3. Model No.:<br />
4. Size:<br />
5. Color:<br />
6. Notes:<br />
7. QTY:<br />
J. Coffee Machine: Owner Provided<br />
1. Drawing Designation: 09<br />
2. Manufacturer: Tassimo Single Serve<br />
3. Model No.:<br />
4. Size:<br />
5. Notes: No water line required<br />
6. QTY: 1 in Suite 805 and 2 in Suite 850<br />
END OF APPENDIX<br />
OPX- Project No. 3191 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT 05.08.13<br />
Appendix B-2
OJS Building Rules, Regulations, and Requirements<br />
One Judiciary Square<br />
441 4 th Street NW<br />
Washington, DC 20001<br />
The General Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with the Building Rules, Regulations, and Requirements as<br />
outlined below, and shall include and be responsible for all costs that are indicated below as costs to DGS within the<br />
Cost of the Tenant build-out of suites for offices of <strong>DSLBD</strong>.<br />
Scheduled use of the loading dock requires at least 72 hours and is subject to availability, Mon – Fri, 7am –<br />
5:30pm (business hours) and 5:30pm -11pm (by special request to Building Management office, 202-727-<br />
3133).<br />
o<br />
DGS <strong>Construction</strong>: If anyone requires use of the dock outside of that time frame, it will require<br />
overtime engineer coverage at a rate of $81.51 per hour and would have to be arranged 72 hours in<br />
advance. Prospective bidders should include this cost in their bid price.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
All construction materials and goods must be removed by the contractor to include but not limited to large<br />
packing boxes, crates, pallets, debris, unwanted items, etc. Please do not leave any materials, debris or<br />
unwanted items on the loading dock. All construction debris must be removed daily.<br />
The loading dock is to be used for the transfer and delivery of goods and materials only. No space for use a<br />
dumpster is available. Long term parking on the dock is not permitted unless arranged and approved by the<br />
Building Management office, 202-727-3133.<br />
Work may be performed 24 hours a day. All work that could create a noise disturbance to tenants must be<br />
performed during non-business hours, Mon-Fri after 5:30pm and weekends (subject to review). Prospective<br />
bidders should include such cost in their bid price.<br />
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review all necessary drawings and send RFI, if they find that<br />
installation of any drywall of other accessories will limit the maintenance of any existing or newly installed<br />
equipment. All equipment in the area must have clear maintenance access.<br />
All carpet in the general area must be covered by heavy duty paper of plastic so that the carpet is not<br />
damaged or soiled. In the event it becomes damaged as judged by the Owner or Architect, it will be the<br />
responsibility of the Contractor to replace carpet of that area matching the existing carpet.<br />
During the pre-construction meeting or sooner, the OJS Chief Building Engineer and/or his designee, and<br />
the Building Manager will review the approved plans to ensure they are in accordance with the Building<br />
standards and do not impact building systems. Upon review and approval, a sign off by the Chief Building<br />
Engineer will be provided.<br />
All work that requires tie-in to building systems must be pre-arranged with the Building Manager and Building<br />
Engineer, 202-727-2585. Once installed, the work must be approved by DCRA and/or their designee with a<br />
signed copy of the Certificate of Occupancy provided to the Building Manager.<br />
o DGS <strong>Construction</strong>: Any requests to tie-in Fire, Sprinkler and related Building Emergency<br />
Notification systems must be contracted directly with the Building’s fire alarm and sprinkler systems<br />
contractors, Siemens and/or Guardian. This is not a Facilities/Building Management cost.All new<br />
systems installation shall be synchronized with existing systems.<br />
OPX – Project No. 3191 Building Rules, Regs, Requirements -1 of 2 05.08.13
OJS Building Rules and Regulations<br />
<br />
<br />
Passenger elevators are not to be used to haul or transport materials and goods. The freight elevators<br />
located on the north and south side can be used for this purpose and subject to availability. Use of the<br />
freight elevator must be pre-arranged with the Building Management office, 202-727-3133.<br />
OJS has a restrictive key way system and the bitting must be maintained. DGS FD will provide a letter of<br />
authorization for the purchase of locks, cores, key blanks and/or keys by the contractor. Please contact the<br />
Building Manager to request authorization, 202-727-2585.<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
DGS <strong>Construction</strong>:The cost to key the newly constructed offices to OJS’ key way system must be<br />
included in <strong>Construction</strong> costs.<br />
Contractor shall be responsible to install a lock box and populate that with keys with distinct door<br />
numbers so that it is easy to identify all keys of the entire suit. Contractor must consider this cost in<br />
their pricing.<br />
All door locks shall be Schlage, Commercial grade to match building standard. GC shall provide<br />
Master Keying to match building Masters.<br />
All Door Hardware shall match building standard<br />
<br />
During the demolition work the contractor must:<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Protect the area within their scope so that dust does not enter in vicinity suites;<br />
Demolition work must be conducted during close of business hours;<br />
If required by the drawings, installation, relocation, and programming of any VAV boxes shall be<br />
coordinated with the Building Engineer in order to stay compatible with the existing Building<br />
Management System. Please see mechanical details for more clarification. EASI Controls has<br />
programmed all VAV boxes in the building. EASI can be reached at 877-538-3274.<br />
All work that requires tie-in to building systems must be pre-arranged with the Building Manager<br />
and Building Engineer (202-727-2585). Once installed, the work must be approved by DCRA<br />
and/or their designee with a signed copy of the Certificate of Occupancy provided to the Building<br />
Manager.<br />
The Contractor shall keep the air handling units filters clean during construction. Fixing all<br />
damages to the air handling units due to dust will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Upon<br />
Substantial completion, the contractor shall install new filters for the air handling units servicing the<br />
construction area.<br />
<br />
It will be the responsibility of the contractor to conduct all due diligence before proceeding with such work.<br />
That includes,<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
At a minimum, x-ray/GPR of the affected area before conducting drilling/channeling work;<br />
All types of x-ray/GPR work must be performed outside of business hours;<br />
Schedule the x-ray/GPF work with the Facility Engineer by providing notices at least 72 hours<br />
before the actual work;<br />
Result of x-ray/GPR must be provide to the AE with a copy to the Project Manager and get<br />
approval before conducting the actual work;<br />
Core Drilling/Channeling work must be performed outside of business hours.<br />
END<br />
DGS OJS Page 2 of 2 05.08.13<br />
OPX – Project No. 3191